Home

Model 51i - User Manual

1. Figure 7 5 Replacing the Pump High Temperature Inlet Exhaust N Figure 7 6 Replacing the Pump Low Temperature Pump Rebuilding For the new technology pump repair kit part number 108091 00 use the H eated Head Versi on following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 7 7 provided by KNF The new technology pump will have the repair kit part number on its label If no repair kit part number is listed refer to the procedure for the older model pump following this procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 13 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version 7 14 Model 51i Instruction Manual Equipment Required Pump repair kit heated head version Marking pencil or Sharpie marker Nut driver 7 mm Needle nose pliers Spanner wrench Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Make a sketch of the position of any tubes and fittings for ease of re assembly later 2 Remove the pump assembly from the analyzer as described in Pump Replacement 3 Mark the position of the pump head plate intermediate plate and compressor housing relative to each other by drawing a line on the edges with a pencil or marker to ensure prop
2. gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2200 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Error status Internal Temperature Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Flame Out Alarm 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Detector OR Filter OR Pump Temp 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Alarm Bias Voltage Alarm 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Pressure Alarm All 3 pressures 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Heater Fail Alarm 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Temp Sensor Fail Alarm 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Conc Alarm 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual D 7
3. Digital output board Nut driver 3 16 inch amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Disconnect the digital output board ribbon cable from the motherboard 4 Using the nut driver remove the two standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 21 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 59 Servicing Motherboard Replacement Motherboard Replacement 7 60 Model 517 Instruction Manual A 5 Pop the digital output board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 6 To install the digital output board follow the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the motherboard Figure 7 20 Equipment Required Motherboard Philips screwdriver Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the I O expansion board optional if used See the I O Expans
4. e Press to leave warning screen and begin automatic calibration 3 74 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu Du Dueh Input Frequency Display The Input Frequency Display screen is used to manually adjust the input board gain This may be used as a troubleshooting tool to ensure that the input board is working properly The gain setting and test mode are reset upon exiting this screen That is no changes are saved Note that this screen can be used while the flame is still lit and is mainly for diagnostic purposes e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Input Frequency Disp e Press to leave warning screen e Use f jand jto toggle the test signal between ON and OFF e Use Jand gt Jto change the gain between 1 10 and 100 TOT PER Temperature Calibration The Temperature Calibration screen allows the user to view and set the ambient temperature sensor offset which basically adjusts the temperature sensor so that it reads correctly Wait at least 30 seconds for the reading to stabilize before saving the value Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Temperature Calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 75 Operation Service Menu Analog Output Calibration The Analog Output Calibration menu provides access to the 6 voltage
5. 5 Analog3 17 TTL Input2 6 Analog ground 18 TTL Input3 7 Analog4 19 TTL_Input4 8 Analog ground 20 Digital ground 9 Analog5 21 TTL Inputb 10 Analog ground 22 TTL Input6 11 Analog6 23 TTL Input7 12 Analog ground 24 Digital ground Thermo Fisher Scientific D O Terminal Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 2 5 See Table 2 2 for channels and pin connections 9 o000000000000000000 OOOOOOOcOOOOOOOOOOOO Figure 2 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 2 2 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 THC Analog Output 2 33 3 THC Analog Output 3 15 5 None 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable Ifany customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Figure 2 6 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 3 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Model 51i Instruction Manual 2 9 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A Assembled 25 Pin Terminal Board 2 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual See Detail B i w PAN e
6. Internal Temp Min or Max The Detector Temperature screen displays the current detector temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 115 to 210 C If the detector temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Detector Temp The Minimum Detector Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum detector temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum detector temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Detector Temp Min or Max Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 61 Operation Alarms Menu ip sub ML PRA Filter Temperature The Filter Temperature screen displays the current filter temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 115 to 210 C If the filter temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Filter Temp Min and Max Filter The Minimum Filter Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum filter temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum filter temperature screens function the sam
7. Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 10 LD5 LCD Signal 11 LD1 LCD Signal 12 LD6 LCD Signal 13 LD2 LCD Signal 14 LD7 LCD Signal 15 LD3 LCD Signal 16 LCD Bias Voltage 17 5V 18 Ground 19 Ground 20 LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal 21 Keypad Row 2 Input 22 Keypad Row 1 Input 23 Keypad Row 4 Input 24 Keypad Row 3 Input 25 Keypad Col 2 Select 26 Keypad Col 1 Select 2 Keypad Col 4 Select 28 Keypad Col 3 Select 29 Ground 30 Ground 31 Ground 32 Ground 33 24V 34 24V LCD DATA J2 1 LDO 5V LCD Signal 2 LD1_5V LCD Signal 3 LD2 5V LCD Signal 4 LD3_5V LCD Signal 5 LCD ONOFF 5V LCD Signal 6 LFLM_5V LCD Signal 7 NC 8 LLP 5V LCD Signal 9 LCLK_5V LCD Signal 6 18 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt 99 N Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 5V Ground 25V LCD Bias Voltage Ground KEYBOARD J3 0 N C wo A CO N Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Keypad Col 4 Select LCD BACKLIGHT J4 5V Supply NC Ground Table 6 7 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label EXPANSION 1 0
8. gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o O1 m 99 N wo 0 N N N N N N N N N N O cO O N OORA CO N O Relay 1 Contact a Relay 2 Contact a Relay 3 Contact a Relay 4 Contact a Relay 5 Contact a Relay 6 Contact a Relay 7 Contact a Relay 8 Contact a Relay 9 Contact a Relay 10 Contact a NC Solenoid Drive Output 1 Solenoid Drive Output 2 Solenoid Drive Output 3 Solenoid Drive Output 4 Solenoid Drive Output 5 Solenoid Drive Output 6 Solenoid Drive Output 7 Solenoid Drive Output 8 Relay 1 Contact b Relay 2 Contact b Relay 3 Contact b Relay 4 Contact b Relay 5 Contact b Relay 6 Contact b Relay 7 Contact b Relay 8 Contact b Relay 9 Contact b Relay 10 Contact b 24V 24V Model 51 Instruction Manual 6 21 Troubleshooting Service Locations Connector Reference Pin Label Designator 32 33 34 35 36 37 Signal Description 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V Table 6 9 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Label Designator PMT IN J1 1 N Signal Description PMT Input Ground INTF BD J2 o 0 N O o A CO N gt o 15V Ground 15V 5V Ground Measurement Frequency Output Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage SPI Input SPI Clock SPI Board Select Service For additional assistance Thermo Fisher Scientific has service available Locations from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below
9. lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content select Field Analog Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 27 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Commit Content The Commit Content screen is used to save any changes that have been made to any of the record fields for the selected record type Saving changes will erase record log file data for that record type If no changes have been made NO CHANGES TO RECORD LIST will appear For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Select Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Commit Content EDEIZE My Py Tite Pria iii i d H ouod MAMA Reset to Default Content The Reset to Default Content screen is used to reset all of the datalogging record field items to default values for the selected record type For more information about selecting the content of logged data fields see Sclect Content above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Reset to Default Content 3 28 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument
10. 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 300 This command sets the time interval between two consecutive streaming data strings to number value in seconds The following example sets the number value to 10 seconds Send set stream per 10 Receive set stream per 10 ok stream time This command reports if the streaming data string will have a time stamp attached to it or not according to l able B 6 The following example reports that the streaming data shall not include a time stamp Send stream time Receive stream time O set stream time value This command enables value where value is to attach or disable time stamp to streaming data string according to Table B 6 The following example attaches a time stamp to streaming data Send set stream time O Receive set stream time O ok Table B 6 Stream Time Values Value Stream Time 0 Attaches time stamp to streaming data string 1 Disables time stamp to streaming data string B 26 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration C Link Protocol Commands Calibration set cal thc bkg set zero calibrate These commands will set the THC background The following example shows a successful auto calibration of the THC background Note Zero air must be provided to the instrument prior to issuing any of these commands A Send set cal thc bkg Receive set cal thc bkg ok set cal thc coef set span calibrate
11. 5 Install the input board by following the previous steps in reverse 7 26 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Input Board Calibration A Servicing Input Board Calibration 6 Re install the measurement case assembly Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 7 Perform an input board calibration See the Input Board Calibration procedure that follows After replacing the input board use the following procedure to calibrate the input board WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration The Input Board Calibration screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 Atthe Input Board Calibration screen choose Automatic Input Cal which automatically calibrates the input board and stores the D A value If preferred the user may choose the Manual Input Cal function and use the following procedure to perform the calibration 3 The screen displays the frequency at GAIN 1 Make a note of the FREQ value displayed then press Ce or to change the GAIN to 100 4 At the GAIN 100 screen use _ t to incr
12. E A Sample Filter Flow Restrictors M IN y gt lt Span Inlet N b4 Zero Inlet Sample Pump lt Fuel K gt lt Fuel Inlet a d lt lt Air lt lt e lt lt Support Air Inlet N EA i d f E E f Sample e TON NUES PM N Step Down N Pressure Regulator Electronic Pressure Controllers Analog Pressure Gauge Figure 1 2 Model 51 Gas Flow System Fuel entering the instrument at the rear panel passes through a 2 way solenoid valve that acts as a safety shut off in case of a flame out or other malfunction From the shut off valve the fuel flows to an electronic pressure controller In conjunction with a flow restrictor installed in the detector base the pressure controller regulates the flow of fuel Sample is drawn into the unit by an internal vacuum pump The sample moves from the inlet bulkhead through a sintered metal filter element and then into the vacuum side of the pump The pump exhaust flows through a capillary restrictor to a tee fitting One branch of the tee leads to the detector base and the other branch leads to the sample bypass Make up air mixes with the sample at the bypass port to create a back pressure that controls the flow rate of sample into the FID Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Specifications Specifications Table 1 1 lists the specifications for the Model 512 Table 1 1 Model 51 Specifications Preset ranges 1 10 100 1000 5000 10000 ppm
13. Eraik prng Dh PTS E mid PPP LES Evi Li Analog Output Configuration The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog Select Channel output channels available for configuration Channel choices include all voltage channels all current channels individual voltage channels 1 6 and individual current channels 1 6 if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config prank prup Poh dm mT Prid YU LE HIC EH DEB EI Pini Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 43 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Allow Over Under Range Analog Output Configuration Select Action Select Range 3 44 Model 51 Instruction Manual The Allow Over Under Range screen is used to select whether or not the analog outputs are allowed to exceed the maximum selected value of 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V or 20 mA or the minimum selected value of 0 V 0 mA or 4 mA By default this parameter is set to on and 596 over and under range is allowed for all analog output channels e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config Allow Over Under Range ERE ES D ITem DH DIEM PEUPLE PUO Mi EOSGROGUPIQZO AS d The Analog Output Configuration menu displays a list of the analog output configuration choices from which the user selects the parameter to adjust for the
14. I O Configuration Analog Input Config ERED CH T ELEM hias ini 1 1 EN DHOBM BEE EE anal Beane iki ear i mh Qu DM Descriptor The Descriptor screen allows the user to enter the descriptor or name for the selected analog input channel The descriptor is used in datalogging and streaming data to report what data is being sent out The descriptor Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 47 Operation Instrument Controls Menu may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to IN1 to IN8 user input channel number e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config select Channel Descriptor O PILRQOPUPMPO Units The Units screen allows the user to enter the units for the selected analog input channel The units are displayed on the diagnostic screen and in datalogging and streaming data The units may be from 1 to 3 characters in length and defaults to V volts e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config select Channel Units DH HIM Pil pie fiini i Decimal Places The Decimal Places screen allows the user to select how many digits are displayed to the right of the decimal point from 0 to 6 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config select Channel Decimal Places f9 i e DRED M
15. Reference Designator J1 Pin cO aoa N on A CO N Signal Description Analog Voltage Input 1 Analog Voltage Input 2 Analog Voltage Input 3 Ground Analog Voltage Input 4 Analog Voltage Input 5 Analog Voltage Input 6 Ground Analog Voltage Input 7 Analog Voltage Input 8 Ground NC Current Output Return Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 19 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20 Model 51 Instruction Manual Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o O1 LA 20 22 23 24 25 Signal Description Ground Current Output 1 Current Output Return Current Output 2 Current Output Return Current Output 3 Current Output Return Current Output 4 Current Output Return Current Output 5 Current Output Return Current Output 6 MOTHER BD Connector Label MOTHER BD J2 Reference Designator J1 0 N C wo A CO N Pin cO OO N on A CO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS485 to Motherboard RS485 to Motherboard Table 6 8 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground SPI Reset SPI Input SPI Output Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description SPI Board Select SPI Clock DIGITAL OUTPUTS J2 cO 0 Ooo CO PY
16. The erec Irec and srec layouts contain the following Definition A format specifier for parsing ASCII responses e A format specifier for parsing binary responses In addition to these the erec layout contains e A format specifier for producing the front panel display screens Values are read using either the ASCII or binary format specifiers and converted to uniform internal representations 32 bit floats or 32 bit integers These values are converted into text for display on the screen using the format specifier for the front panel display Normally the specifier used to parse a particular datum from the input stream will be strongly related to the specifier used to display it such as all of the floating point inputs will be displayed with an f output specifier and all of the integer inputs will be displayed with a d specifier Format Specifier for The first line of the layout response is the scanf like parameter list for ASCII Responses parsing the fields from an ASCII erec response Parameters are separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n the normal line separator character Valid fields are 96s parse a string d parse a decimal number ld parse a long 32 bit decimal number f parse a floating point number x parse a hexadecimal number lx parse a long 32 bit hex number ignore the field Note Signed versus unsigned for the integer values does not matter it is handled aut
17. The following example reports that the THC calibration gas concentration is 40 0 ppb Send span conc Receive span conc 4 000E 01 ppb set span conc value This command sets the THC span gas concentration used by the auto calibration routine to value where value is a floating point representation of the gas concentration in the currently selected units The gas units are the same as those chosen by the user in the Range menu The following example sets the THC calibration gas concentration to 100 0 ppb Send set span conc 100 0 Receive set span conc 100 0 ok push button do ri down right en ru enter run he up help 1 le 2 left 3 me 4 menu button do down en enter he help le left me menu ri right ru run up 1 2 3 4 These commands simulate pressing the front panel pushbuttons The numbers represent the front panel soft keys from left to right Send push enter Receive push enter ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display isc iscreen These commands retrieve the framebuffer data used for the display on the iSeries instrument It is 19200 bytes in size 2 bits per pixel 4 pixels per byte arranged as 320 by 240 characters The data is sent in RLE encoded form to save time in transmission It is sent as a type 5 binary C Link response with no checksum The RLE encoding consists of a 0 followed by an 8 bit count of consecutive OxFF byt
18. The unlock instrument screen is shown if the instrument is locked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Unlock Instrument Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 81 Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 4 Calibration The Model 51 is a quantitative instrument that can accurately measure hydrocarbons at a wide range of concentrations However as with all electronic instruments the accuracy of the measurements depends on proper calibration In general terms calibration is the process that establishes the relationship between the detector s output signal and the concentration of hydrocarbons in the sample stream When hydrocarbons enter the instrument detector a hydrogen air flame ionizes the molecules This ionization process causes an electrical current to flow between two electrodes located in the detector The magnitude of the current flow can be measured and is directly related to the concentration of organic compounds in the sample Calibration establishes the relationship between the electrical current measured in pico amps and the hydrocarbon concentration which is usually measured in parts per million ppm by volume Because signal intensity can be affected by operating parameters such as the flow rate of the sample the type of fuel being used or the detector temperature a permanent calibration cannot be established and the instrument must be calibrated on a routine basis Calibration is best achieved u
19. channels and 6 current channels for calibration Current channels are visible only if the I O expansion board is installed Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal o Miker BREED CRA PTC gy Dei PEUPLE PUO Mi ESGROGUPLILQIO PUPRSSPCHP P Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the Zero zero state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until it reads 0 0 V on the meter for a voltage channel or either 0 or 4 mA for a current channel depending on the selected range See the set output to field on the display e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel Calibrate Zero 3 76 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu ih E ITEM EN DHOBM PPP LES Ea Li Analog Output Calibrate The Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate Full Scale the full scale state of the selected analog output The operator must connect a volt meter to the output and adjust the output until the meter reads the value shown in the set output to field in either V or mA depending on the selected output channel e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Out Cal gt select Channel Calibrate Full Scale BRE Li P
20. e Ethernet Communications e I O connector with Power Fail Relay 16 Digital Inputs and 6 Analog Voltage Outputs Internal connectors e Function Key Panel and Display e Measurement Interface Board e I O Expansion Board e Digital Output Board e AC Distribution The measurement interface board serves as a central connection area for all measurement electronics in the instrument It contains power supplies and interface circuitry for sensors and control devices in the measurement system It sends status data to the motherboard and receives control signals from the motherboard Connectors located on the measurement interface board include e Data communication with the motherboard e 24 V and 120 VAC power supply inputs e Solenoid outputs e 120 VAC output for the pump and fan e 120 VAC outputs for the oven heaters e Pressure controller communication links e Thermocouple sensor inputs e Ambient temperature sensor e FID high voltage bias supply e Measurement input board Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 7 System Description Electronics Input Board Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Front Panel Connector Board 8 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual The input board is located in an aluminum housing mounted on the front of the detector oven The board receives the FID signal through a BNC cable that runs from the FID and scales it by a factor of approximately 1 10 or 100 The board includes a hig
21. exceeded range limit Concentration low Check to ensure range corresponds with expected value If not select proper range Check user defined low set point be sure the min trigger is set as desired Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Motherboard Status Alarm Interface Status Alarm 1 0 Exp Status Internal cables not connected properly Board is defective Check that all internal cables are connected properly Re cycle AC power to analyzer If still alarming change board Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 7 Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams Board Level Figure 6 1 and Figure 6 2 are board level connection diagrams for the common electronics and measurement system These illustrations can be Connection used along with the connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table D lagrams 6 9 to troubleshoot board level faults VOEXPANSION BOARD EXPANSONIO Ji NEASUREVENT DIGITAL OUTPUT TO SYSTEM BOARD DIGITAL 2 outputs S Pn 11 Pin 8 Pin J14 PLA 14Pn LCD rre PPl 3m ji FPO DISPLAY RLR PIB Jags PAE Mg 9BHn 34 Bin BOARD 3Hn BASET B KEY PANEL 1OBASET 42 am EXPANSION RS48 J15 1SPn MOTHERBOARD Msg SPAFEDATA ANALOGOUTPUTS DIGITAL INPUTS 37 pp DATA Jt gt 3Pn 3Pin at 2Hn m POWER GOCD B 2Hn PY RB RP 3Pn 3Pn 3Pin ie 24VDC REARPANEL AG P
22. set alarm filter temp min value set alarm filter temp max value These commands set the filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the filter temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the filter temperature alarm maximum value to 210 C Send set alarm filter temp max 210 Receive set alarm filter temp max 210 ok alarm flame temp min alarm flame temp max These commands report the current flame temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the flame temperature alarm minimum value is 210 0 C Send alarm flame temp min Receive alarm flame temp min 210 0 deg C set alarm flame temp min value set alarm flame temp max value These commands set the flame temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the flame temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the flame temperature alarm maximum value to 300 G Send set alarm flame temp max 300 Receive set alarm flame temp max 300 ok alarm internal temp min alarm internal temp max Model 51i Instruction Manual B 13 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 14 Model 51i Instruction Manual These commands report the current internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the internal temperature alarm minimum value is 1
23. set calibrate These commands will set THC coefficient based on THC span gas concentration The following example shows a successful auto calibration of the THC coefficient Note Span gas must be provided to the instrument prior to issuing any of these commands A Send set cal thc coef Receive set cal thc coef ok thc bkg This command reports the current THC background The following example reports that the THC background is 0 5 ppb Send thc bkg Receive thc bkg 0 5 ppb set thc bkg value This command is used to set the THC background to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the background in the currently selected units The following example sets the THC background to 0 5 ppb Send set thc bkg 0 5 Receive set thc bkg 0 5 ok the coef This command reports the current THC coefficient The following example reports that the THC coefficient is 1 000 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 27 C Link Protocol Commands Keys Display B 28 Keys Display Model 51i Instruction Manual Send thc coef Receive thc coef 1 000 set thc coef value This command sets the THC coefficient to a user defined value where value is a floating point representation of the coefficient The following example sets the THC coefficient to 1 005 Send set thc coef 1 005 Receive set thc coef 1 005 ok span conc This command reports the THC span gas concentration used to auto calibrate the THC coefficient
24. the current THC concentration reading on the above line also changes However no actual changes are made to the value stored in memory until is pressed Only proposed changes as indicated by a question mark prompt are displayed until is pressed Note The screen will show SPAN CONC NOT VALID if the coefficient change causes the concentration to be either higher than the selected range or less than or equal to zero A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Coef Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 13 Operation Calibration Menu Ehe PEE F Reset User Calibration The Reset User Calibration Defaults screen allows the user to reset the Defaults calibration factors to factory defaults e In the Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Reset User Cal Defaults POE ia PTE EDN PUHE CELL ETET hei Bat i i a E Fut Py Tite Lr Air AE Calibration Menu The Calibration menu is used to automatically set the zero background and the span coefficient The zero span check menu item is visible only if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration IN Py Tae DH DEhi Fi Labi ik i Calibrate Background The Calibrate Background screen is used to adjust the instrument zero or background Before making an adjustment be sure the analyzer samples zero air until the reading stabilizes The display shows the current THC reading and the current background value Press to set the T
25. where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr nm 255 255 252 0 Receive set addr nm 255 255 252 0 ok addr ntp This command reports the IP address for the network time protocol server Send addr ntp Receive addr ntp 10 209 43 237 set addr ntp address This command sets the network time protocol server address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 Receive set addr ntp 10 209 43 237 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration baud This command reports the current baud rate for the serial port RS232 RS485 The following example reports that the current baud rate is 9600 baud Send baud Receive baud 9600 set baud rate rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 This command sets the instrument baud rate to rate The following example sets the instrument s baud rate to 9600 Note After the command is sent the baud rate of the sending device must be changed to agree with the instrument A Send set baud 9600 Receive set baud 9600 ok dhcp This command reports the current state of use of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP as on
26. 10981 Ignitor without wire and connector attached requires soldering 11032 O ring FID Flame Sensor 006 red silicone 103581 00 Flame Sensor Thermocouple Assembly 105151 00 Detector O ring Kit three each of 14814 14816 11032 16013 qty 6 of 6646 105152 00 Detector Rebuild Kit one each of 104158 00 104155 00 103770 00 14816 16013 14814 11032 qty 2 of 6646 103952 01 Pressure Controller Air 103952 02 Pressure Controller Fuel 103952 03 Pressure Controller Back Pressure 104872 00 Pressure Regulator 101055 00 Main AC Receptacle Assembly 103687 00 Detector Pogo Assembly 104139 00 Sample Frit Fitting 104151 00 Exhaust Frit Bulkhead Fitting 105554 01 Bypass Orifice Bulkhead 016 517 HT 105554 02 Bypass Orifice Bulkhead 018 517 LT Expendable item not covered by warranty Table 7 2 lists the Model 51 High Temperature and the Model 51 Low Temperature cables See the Troubleshooting chapter for associated connection diagrams and board connector pin descriptions Table 7 2 Model 51 Cables Part Number Description 101349 00 AC Power Cable 115 VAC US 8926 AC Power Cable 220 VAC EU 01036 00 DC Power Supply 24 V Output 101037 00 115 VAC Supply to Measurement Interface Board 101048 00 RS 485 Data 101038 00 AC Power Switch to Motherboard 101364 00 DC Power Supply Status Monitor 101054 00 Motherboard to Front Panel Board 101035 00 DC Power Supply AC Input Thermo
27. 21f Code 0 Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code 5 Code 6 Code 7 Code 8 Code 9 Code 10 Code 11jLset range no d n This is a line which appears slightly indented the title is again NO and the value is the twenty first element of the data response interpreted as a floating point number There is a no translation button which creates a selection list of twelve Code nn options The number of the user selection is used to create the output command Mode 6 12 13x local remote service service 0 1 Tset mode s n This is a line which has a title of Mode and value taken from the sixth field of the data response There is a bitfield extraction of bits 12 through 13 from the source the value type is not important here because the value is being translated to an output string Once the bits have been extracted they are shifted down to the bit zero position Thus the possible values of this example will be 0 through 3 The translation list shows the words which correspond to each input value the zero index value appearing first 0 gt local 1 gt remote etc The selection list shows that only the first two values in this case are to be shown to the user when the button is pressed The T button indicates full translation input code to string and user selection number to output string xC This is a line that starts a new column the xC or L Comp 6 11x off on Tset temp comp s n This shows that the bitfield end the second
28. Analog Output Testing 5 To install the DC power supply follow the previous steps in reverse The analog outputs should be tested if the concentration value on the front panel display disagrees with the analog outputs To check the analog outputs connect a meter to an analog output channel voltage or current and compare the meter reading with the output value set on the Test Analog Outputs screen Equipment Required Multimeter Use the following procedure to test the analog outputs 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be tested Figure 7 14 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs screen appears 3 Press to scroll to the desired channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pins where the meter is connected and press The Set Analog Outputs screen appears 4 Press 4 to set the output to zero The Output Set To line displays Zero 5 Check that the meter is displaying the zero value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full scale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows 6 Press to set the output to full scale The Output Set To line displays Full Scale 7 Check that the meter is displaying a full scale value If the meter reading differs by more than one percent of the full s
29. Board asa erste ovo fedis 8 7 Measurement Interface Board Connectors sese 8 7 Input Board ii ioaea raean EE EENE iaat 8 8 Digital Output Board ed eques a dede dietus 8 8 I O Expansion Board Optional siria 8 8 Front Panel Connector Dodd E RIDE 8 8 VO Components eei ote ais 8 9 Analog Voltage COUEDUES e oot Si cite nll Moe tnnc feas 8 9 Analog Current Outputs Optional saciedad 8 9 Analog Voltage Inputs Optional dettes 8 10 Digital Relay Opus il 8 10 Digital pts a au sec ctt i 8 10 A ML cha te chee itum Aut 8 11 85 232 Connection cito toe Ire ate eo adn 8 11 RS 485 Connection seiners otra 8 12 Ethernet Connecti Merei eisa kean iiai fedis 8 12 External Accessory Connector minas 8 12 Optional EquipiiBht nor rte eem 9 1 Internal Zero Span Valves units 9 1 I O Expansion Board Asserably cer eene 9 1 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly sd da iode esa een 9 1 Terminal Block and Cable sara 9 1 Cabless sans a tia db N 9 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual xi Contents xii Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Model 51 Instruction Manual Mounting OPA 9 3 MU eA A O T A 1 C Link Protocol Commands eren eerte B 1 Instrument Identification Number eese B 1 Comis oia B 2 Commands Lrt sasis is B 3 Meee Se te p e edie B 9 O uta EL M pM O M Ed NEU B 11 Di E B 17 bnc ii B 18 LE osos n eRe ene ULL UO MAUI MED LAE B 27 Keys DSp
30. CR gt with no checksum or lt ETX gt followed by the correct checksum lt BCC gt D 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Sample Data Reply String in response to Data Query Command DA In response to a valid data query command the instrument responds in the following format STX 2MDO2 SP address SP measured valuel SP status SP SFKT SP address 1 SP measured value2 gt lt SP gt lt status gt lt SP gt lt SFKT gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The response uses the same command terminators as used by the received command i e if the received command was terminated with a CR then the response is terminated with lt CR gt and if the command was terminated with a lt ETX gt lt BCCs then the response is terminated with lt ETX gt and the computed checksum lt BCC gt The 02 after the MD indicates that two measurements are present in the reply string 03 for three measurements and so on This will also determine the length of the reply string lt address gt is the Instrument Address Each subsequent measurement attached to the response will have the lt address X gt where X keeps incrementing by 1 for each measurement included lt measured value gt is the concentration value in currently selected gas units represented as exponential representation with 4 characters mantissa an
31. Command responses are generally echoed with a data element appended Note If the Service Mode is active C Link set commands are not allowed This is to prevent parameters from being changed remotely while the unit is being serviced locally A If an incorrect command is sent an error message is generated The list of error responses is shown in Table B 1 The following example sends the incorrect command set unit ppm instead of the correct command set gas unit ppm Send set unit ppm Receive set unit ppm bad cmd Thermo Fisher Scientific Commands List Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Table B 1 Error Response Messages Command Response Description bad cmd Command is not recognized too high Supplied value is higher than the upper limit too low Supplied value is lower than the lower limit invalid string Supplied string invalid typically because a letter was detected when the value should be numeric data not valid Supplied value is not acceptable for entered command can t wrong settings Command not allowed for current measurement mode can t mode is service Command not allowed while instrument is in service mode feature not enabled 1 0 expansion board is not detected flags no alarm active No measurement alarms are active The save and set save params commands duplicated for backward compatibility store parameters in FLASH memory It is importan
32. Controls Menu Configure Datalogging The Configure Datalogging menu deals with datalogging configuration for the currently selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging PRSE Poh dm PTS EH mid PPP LES Evi Li Logging Period Min The Logging Period Min screen is used to select the logging period in minutes for the selected record format srec or lrec List of choices include off 1 5 15 30 and 60 minutes default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging Logging Period Min EH DHOBM LP I5RHZE CH Pr Tit ELEM yd EN EEE A Bone i d ROSCGLGU Memory Allocation The Memory Allocation Percent screen is used to select the percentage of Percent total memory that may be used by the selected record type lrecs or srecs Percentages between 0 and 100 are available in increments of 10 Changing this value results in log erasure for both types of records and changing the percent allocated to one record type will automatically change the other e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Datalogging Settings gt Configure Datalogging gt Memory Allocation 96 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 29 Operation Instrument Controls Menu pum pr gpr E A o pH Ebel Data Treatment The Data Treatment screen is used to select the data
33. Guides Action Check air sources Check plumbing for leaks Check electrical cabling between pressure sensor and measurement interface board Check gas sources Check plumbing for leaks Check electrical cabling between pressure sensor and measurement interface board Alarm Air Pressure Pressure low Check gas sources Check plumbing for leaks Check electrical cabling between pressure sensor and measurement interface board Alarm Bias Voltage Circuit failure Check voltages in Diagnostics Alarm Signal Strength Bad calibration Check calibration history Alarm THC Over Range Alarm Heater Fail Alarm Temp Sensor Fail THC concentration too high No action required Not an instrument fault Check heaters Refer to General Electrical Testing in the Servicing chapter Check temperature sensors Refer to General Electrical Testing in the Servicing chapter Alarm Ignitor Check Ignitor has failed Plug in the installed spare ignitor or replace the ignitor s Alarm Zero Noise Alarm Span Noise Bad calibration Check calibration system and calibration history Alarm Zero Check Alarm Span Check Instrument out of calibration Re calibrate instrument Alarm Zero Autocal Alarm Span Autocal Instrument out of calibration Check gas supply Perform manual calibration Alarm Concentration Concentration has
34. IN PJ1 w N AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground AC 24VPWR 6 14 Model 517 Instruction Manual PJ2 gt AC HOT AC NEUT AC Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator AC INTF BD PJ3 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator AC IN J1 1 AC HOT 2 AC NEUT 3 AC Ground AC PUMP J2 1 AC HOT AC NEUT Switched 3 AC Ground P C HTR J3 Pump Column Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT DET HTR J4 Detector Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT FLT HTR J5 Filter Heater AC Control 2 AC HOT 24V IN J6 24V 2 Ground DATA J7 Ground 2 RS485 from Motherboard 3 RS485 from Motherboard FAN J8 24V Fused 2 Ground FAN J9 24V Fused 2 Ground Z APMP J10 24V 2 Ground ZAHIR J11 24V 2 Ground FILTER TC J12 Filter TC Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 15 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 2 Filter TC DET BASE TC J13 1 Detector Base TC 2 Detector Base TC PMP COL TC J14 1 Pump Column TC 2 Pump Column TC FLAME TC J15 1 Flame TC 2 Flame TC AMB TEMP J16 1 Ambient Temperature Thermistor 2 Ground VENT J17 1 24V 2 Vent Solenoid Control PUMP J18 1 24V 2 Pum
35. Menu background correction must be increased to 5 2 ppm in order for the THC reading to be at 0 ppm That is a THC reading of 5 2 ppm minus a THC background reading of 5 2 ppm gives the corrected THC reading of 0 To set the THC reading in the following example to zero use to increment the THC background correction to 5 2 ppm As the THC background correction is increased the THC concentration is decreased Note that at this point pressing Jand 9 have no effect on the analog outputs or the stored THC background correction of 0 0 ppm A question mark following the THC background correction indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To escape this screen without saving any changes press to return to the Calibration Factors menu or to return to the Run screen Press to actually set the THC reading to 0 ppm and store the new background correction of 5 2 ppm Then the question mark prompt beside the THC reading disappears e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors gt Bkg ry Pi E dra Pa hij USE CPV PT Oud Re 4 PUP The Coefficient screen allows the span coefficient to be manually changed while sampling span gas of known concentration The display shows the current THC reading The next line of the display shows the THC span coefficient that is stored in memory and is being used to correct the THC concentration Notice that as the span coefficient value is changed
36. New Technology Low Temp Version 7 22 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version For older models repair kit part number 8606 use the following procedure to replace the low temperature pump diaphragm and valve plate for the Model 512 LT only Figure 7 10 During normal use the diaphragm and valve plate are the only parts of the pump that need to be replaced 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the pump assembly from the analyzer as described in Pump Replacement 3 For ease of re assembly mark the relative positions of the head plate and bottom plate with a line using the pencil or Sharpie type marker 4 Remove the four screws from the top plate and remove the top plate flapper valve and the bottom plate 5 Remove the screw securing the clamping disk and the diaphragm to the piston and remove the diaphragm 6 Assemble the pump with the new flapper valve and diaphragm by following the previous steps in reverse make sure the Teflon white side of the diaphragm is facing up and that the flapper valves cover the holes of the top and bottom plate Do not over tighten the screws 7 lf you are replacing the fittings on the top plate remove any old Teflon tape and carefully apply two layers of new tape to the fitting threads Do not substitute any other type of tape and be sure that the
37. Qu ette 7 4 Replacement Parts Listo nan oe nte cdi i 7 5 UAE M 7 6 External Device Connection Components eee 7 7 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Parla aa Det igi ibat ados aprico eed 7 10 Pump Replicement occas occas aes to obice S bud 7 11 Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version 7 13 Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version eese 7 19 Fan Pilter Replacemetit ne iter ica 7 24 Input Board Replacement tet eis eoe di 7 25 Input Board Cal Ota OMe si caca quete diee atis sita dentata 7 27 DC Power Supply Replacement oaa ead ie the eerste uate dest 7 28 Analog Output Testing dci adosada aba 7 29 Analog Output Calibration ona il 7 31 Analog Input Calibration a i 7 32 Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts 7 32 Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale 7 33 Thermistor Replacement alesana 7 34 Ambient Temperature Calibration zs osse gedosc ii 7 34 Pressure Controller Replacement pts 7 36 Pressure Regulator Replacement void 7 37 Hydrogen Zero Span Solenoid Valve Replacement 7 39 Testing and Replacing the Ignitor euet irati haut 7 39 Checking the Detector Bias Voltage ese eter be ies 7 41 Removing the Detectores oia 7 42 Detector Rebuildinp iii iia n 7 44 Internal Sample Filter Replacements lis 7 49 General El
38. Removing the Detector 7 42 Model 51i Instruction Manual Multimeter Wrench open end 7 16 inch Note Before testing the bias voltage with a voltmeter it should be checked with the built in diagnostics described in Chapter 3 Operation A 1 Locate TP3 next to the IGN BIAS connector J27 on the measurement interface board Connect a multimeter between TP3 and ground Note The voltage should be between 260 and 320 volts If the reading is outside the range then the power supply might have failed and will need to be replaced If the reading is within range continue with step 2 A 2 To test the connection between the bias power supply and the FID turn the main power OFF and remove the IGN BIAS connector J27 from the measurement interface board 3 Connect the multimeter between the bias pin 3 in the connector and instrument ground and check that it shows an open circuit Any indication of continuity shows a short in the wire or at the detector 4 To test the interconnect cable disconnect the BNC connection at the bias pogo and check the continuity between the BNC center pin and pin 3 of J27 plug The reading should indicate continuity 5 To test the bias pogo disconnect instrument power open the oven and allow cooling Once cooled remove the bias pogo from the detector housing using a 7 16 inch wrench It may be necessary to remove the signal pogo to gain access to the bias pogo Once the bias pogo is removed check fo
39. Sub Assemblies connector on one side and a series of screw terminals on the other side These assemblies provide a convenient mechanism for connecting wires from a data system to the analyzer s I O connectors The following terminal board PCB assemblies are available for Series instruments e I O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e D O terminal board PCB assembly 37 pin standard e 25 pin terminal board PCB assembly included with optional I O expansion board 1 0 Terminal Board Figure 2 4 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 1 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument is brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 2 7 Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail B See Detail A 2 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Assembled Connector Detail A Figure 2 4 0 Terminal Board Views Table 2 1 0 Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Detail B Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Analog 13 Power Fail NC 2 Analog ground 14 Power Fail COM 3 Analog2 15 Power Fail NO 4 Analog ground 16 TTL Inputi
40. Up The Flame Out Power Up Information screen read only displays the Information number of flame outs since the last power up and the date and time of the last power up e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Flame Out Powerup Info PRPUPMPO Analog Input Readings The Analog Input Readings screen read only displays the 8 user scaled analog readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Analog Input Readings 3 56 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu n Analog Input Voltages The Analog Input Voltages screen read only displays the 8 raw analog voltage readings if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Analog Input Voltages uper CHI Digital Inputs The Digital Inputs screen read only displays the state of the 16 digital inputs If nothing is connected to an input the internal electronics will pull the voltage up to high and the input will read 1 If a device is connected to an input the user configures whether the relay is normally open or normally closed see Digital Input Settings earlier in this chapter This will dictate whether the input is brought to high 1 or to ground 0 to call for an action e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Digital Inputs Relay States The Relay States screen displays the state of the 10 digital outputs
41. a wide range Therefore measurement of the zero signal and the detector signal at one span point is sufficient to allow measurements taken at concentrations ranging from 20 to 12096 of the span point to be accurate to within 296 of the span value Measurements taken at concentrations outside those limits will typically be sufficiently accurate for most applications but may not meet some of the more demanding regulatory requirements Note When adjusting the analyzer zero or span the averaging time should be set to a value of 30 seconds or higher A Use the following procedure to adjust the instrument zero offset 1 From the Main Menu choose Calibration 2 If necessary move the cursor to Cal Background and press 3 Press gt to open the zero valve or introduce the zero gas through the sample port Thermo Fisher Scientific Span Adjust Fully Automated Zero and Span Checks and Thermo Fisher Scientific Adjustments Calibration Manual Calibration Procedure 4 Allow the instrument to stabilize for at least 5 minutes or until the reading does not appear to be changing 5 Press and the processor will automatically adjust the zero offset value to produce an instrument reading of 0 00 6 Press W to return to the Calibration menu Use the following procedure to adjust the instrument span coefficient 1 From the Main Menu choose Calibration 2 Move the cursor to Cal Coefficient and press 3 Ifthe
42. addr dns address This command sets the domain name server address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Send set addr dns 192 168 1 1 Receive set addr dns 192 168 1 1 ok addr gw This command reports the default TCP IP gateway address Send addr gw Receive addr gw 10 209 42 1 set addr gw address This command sets the default gateway address where address consists of 9 four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Model 51i Instruction Manual B 37 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 38 Model 51i Instruction Manual Send set addr gw 10 209 42 1 Receive set addr gw 10 209 42 1 ok addr ip This command reports the IP address of the analyzer Send addr ip Receive addr ip 10 209 40 155 set addr ip address This command sets the analyzer s IP address where address consists of four numbers ranging from 0 255 inclusive separated by Note This command cannot be used when DHCP is on Refer to the DHCP command that follows for additional information A Send set addr ip 10 209 40 155 Receive set addr ip 10 209 40 155 ok addr nm This command reports the IP netmask Send addr nm Receive addr nm 255 255 252 0 set addr nm address This command sets the netmask address
43. are very hot A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Due to the possibility of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been removed A Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven componenets A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A Do not attempt to lift the analyzer by the cover or other external fittings A Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment that the analyzer is currently connected to A Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Model 51i Instruction Manual iii About This Manual FCC Compliance FCC Compliance WEEE Symbol Where to Get Help iv Model 51i Instruction Manual Alert
44. associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Each kit consists of e one six foot cable e one terminal block e one snap track Note Supporting all of the connections on units with the optional I O expansion board requires e two DB37 kits e one DB25 kit Table 9 1 identifies the optional individual cables that are available for the instrument and Table 9 2 provides the cable color codes For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page f Note Table 9 2 provides the color coding for both 25 pin cables and 37 pin cables Color codes for pins 1 25 are for 25 pin cables color codes for pins 1 37 are for 37 pin cables A Table 9 1 Cable Options Description Cable Length DB37M to open end Six feet DB37F to open end Six feet DB25M to open end Six feet RS 232 Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables Pin Color Pin Color 1 BLACK 20 RED BLACK 2 BROWN 21 ORANGE BLACK 3 RED 22 YELLOW BLACK 4 ORANGE 23 GREEN BLACK 5 YELLOW 24 GRAY BLACK 6 GREEN 25 PINK BLACK 7 BLUE End color codes for 25 pin cables continue for 37 pin cables 8 VIOLET 26 PINK GREEN 9 GRAY 2 PINK RED 19 WHITE 28 PINK VIOLET 11 PINK 29 LIGHT BLUE 12 LIGHT GREEN 30 LIGHT BLUE BROWN 13 BLACK WHITE 31 LIGHT BLUE RED 14 BROWN WHITE
45. for product support and technical information 866 282 0430 Toll Free 508 520 0430 International 6 22 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 7 Servicing This chapter explains how to replace the Model 51 subassemblies It assumes that a subassembly has been identified as defective and needs to be replaced For fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter and the Troubleshooting chapter in this manual The service mode section in the Operation chapter also includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing problems For additional service assistance see Service Locations at the end of this chapter This chapter includes the following parts information and component replacement procedures e Safety Precautions on page 7 3 e Firmware Updates on page 7 4 e Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 e Replacement Parts List on page 7 5 e Cable List on page 7 6 e External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 e Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel on page 7 10 e Pump Replacement on page 7 11 e Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version on page 7 13 e Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version on page 7 19 e Fan Filter Replacement on page 7 24 e Input Board Replacement on page 7 25 e Input Board Calibration on page 7 27 e DC Powe
46. fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number Model 51i Instruction Manual B 33 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 34 Model 51i Instruction Manual representing the sample control pressure in PSI The following example sets the sample control pressure to 5 psi Send set sample control pressure 1 O 5 000 Receive set sample control pressure 1 O 5 000 ok contrast This command reports the screen s level of contrast The following example shows the screen contrast is 50 according to Table B 9 Send contrast Receive contrast 5 50 set contrast level This command sets the screen s level of contrast according to Table B 9 The following example sets the contrast level to 50 Send set contrast 5 Receive set contrast 5 ok Table B 9 Contrast Levels Level Contrast Level 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 10 50 55 6096 6596 7096 7596 8096 8596 OoO ao lrl wal ast oy A wi rn gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N o a m w N Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Level Contrast Level 18 9096 19 95 20 100 date This command reports the current date The following example reports the date as December 1 2006 Send date Receive date 12 01 06 set date mm dd yy mm month dd day yy year This
47. has been put on the market after 13 August 2005 A Service is available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information 866 282 0430 Toll Free 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Chapter 1 Introduction ica ea a ee eee 1 1 Operating Principle of the Flame Ionization Detector 1 2 Operating Principle of the Sampling and Flow Controls 1 3 Specifications EM 1 5 Chapter 2 Installation in 2 1 A 2 1 Unpacking and Inspection i oe ieri te petet ttes ian 2 1 Connecting Sup port Gases inn 2 2 A Toa RO RIS TEE CNN 2 3 Combusti n Mirada 2 4 Calibration Gases ni laa 2 4 Sample Line Conntctioicn att lid 2 4 Venting the Bypassanio ia 2 5 Venting the Pida io 2 6 Power Connection icssissscocesisesadsvessesteiiseiesvesdacsotvescdessovassseteeteassdoas 2 6 Connecting External Wey ices greece eects ae eee ace Oe 2 7 Terminal Board PCB Assemblies esee 2 7 I O Terminal Board saarea tete otia a utt etapa 2 7 D O Terminal Board nia ala 2 9 25 Pin Terminal Borda 2 10 erui less ME 2 12 Chapter 3 dicunt as 3 1 lir E 3 1 PUPS DUCE OTS cutee ha ade a a raise n ME us 3 2 hM o CONNU TL EDT NR CT a UNE 3 3 Alphanumeric Entry SCPeelhacia sudden eenium dehet iie 3 4 Firmware OVervie Wisin adiectis ah ease 3 4 Power Up SCTE Uy O ombre dd ba GRIS
48. in this chapter The detector rebuild kit contains one set of high temperature o rings six o rings per set 4 in the detector and 2 below the detector and three Teflon 7 M Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Detector Rebuilding insulators Each time the detector is opened the o rings should be replaced Teflon insulators should last for at least two years of normal operation In most cases metal parts of the detector do not need to be replaced and can be cleaned and re used Use the following procedure for rebuilding the detector Equipment Required Detector rebuild kit Philips screwdriver Needle nose piers Hex wrench set Wrench 5 16 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Screw starter long handled flat blade optional but very useful Pick for removing o rings angled fine pointed optional Clean cloth or paper towels lint free Clean beaker or other vessel Laboratory detergent such as Alconox Clean solvent such as Methanol or Acetone Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the detector assembly from the lower detector base see Removing the Detector earlier in this chapter and remove the signal and bias pogo assemblies Note If there is a short to ground in eit
49. instrument in idle mode B 36 ignite Sets to attempt to light the FID flame B 36 instr name Reports instrument name B 40 instrument id Reports sets instrument id B 41 internal temp Reports current internal instrument temperature B 11 isc iscreen Retrieves framebuffer data used for the display B 29 layout ack Disables stale layout layout changed indicator B 43 le left Simulates pressing left pushbutton B 28 list din Lists current selection for digital inputs B 19 list dout Lists current selection for digital outputs 19 list Irec Lists current selection Irec logging data B 19 list sp Lists current selection in the scratchpad list B 19 list srec Lists current selection srec logging data B 19 list stream Lists current selection streaming data output B 19 list var aout Reports list of analog output index numbers and variables B 47 list var din Reports list of digital input index numbers and variables B 47 list var dout Reports list of digital output index numbers and variables B 47 low value Reports current low THC concentration B 11 Ir Reports the last Irec stored B 20 Irec Reports maximum number of Irecs B 21 Irec format Reports sets output format for Irecs ASCII or binary B 22 Irec layout Reports current layout of Irec data B 23 Irec mem size Reports maximum number of Irecs that can be stored B 23 Irec per Reports sets Irec logging period B 23 malloc Irec Reports sets memory allocation for Irecs B 24 malloc srec Reports sets memory
50. is specified by a constant in the request data field A value of OxFF00 requests the action to be ON A value of 0x0000 requests it to be OFF All other values are illegal and will not affect the output The normal response is an echo of the request returned after the state has been written Note This function will not work if the instrument is in service mode A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x05 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Output Value 2 Bytes 0x0000 or OxFFOO Error Response Function Code 1 Byte Function code 0x80 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Model 51i Instruction Manual C 7 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported MODBUS Parameters Supported C 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Here is an example of a request to write Coil 5 ON Request Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Response Field Name Function Output Address Hi Output Address Lo Output Value Hi Output Value Lo Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Hex 05 00 05 FF 00 Table C 1 through Table C 3 lists the MODBUS addresses supported for the Model 51i IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU add
51. manual are restricted to qualified service representatives 4 If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A CAUTION Due to the possibility of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been removed A Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven components A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component Figure 7 1 If an antistatic wrist strap is not available be sure to touch the instrument chassis before touching any internal components When the instrument is unplugged the chassis is not at earth ground A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents t
52. minutes and try to restart pump Shut off the main power and try to rotate the pump fan by hand Jamming or excess noise indicates possible bearing failure Call Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Reduced response or no response to span gas System failure Bias voltage has failed No gas reaching the analyzer Span cylinder empty Calibration system failure Ruptured pump diaphragm Faulty FID or input board Check alarm screens and diagnostic voltage screens to localize fault Check voltage diagnostic screen and test point on measurement interface board Check flow and pressure readings on the diagnostics screens Check the source pressure Check zero span solenoids or other hardware to be sure that span gas is being delivered correctly Check flow rate at the sample bulkhead If low flow rebuild pump head Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either FID or input board Replace faulty component If problem still exists check signal cables and replace measurement interface board No response to sample gas 6 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Flame not lit Analyzer not calibrated No gas reaching the analyzer Check flame out alarm status check fuel Recalibrate Check the response to a known span gas Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause Ruptured pump diaphragm Faulty FID or input board Analyze
53. of the pump The following example reports that the pump is always on Send pump Receive pump pump on always set pump off always set pump on always set pump on when hot These commands set the pump to always off always on or on when hot The following example sets the pump to turn on when hot Send set pump on when hot Receive set pump on when hot ok save set save params These commands store all current parameters in FLASH memory It is important that each time instrument parameters are changed that this command be sent If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure The following example saves the parameters to FLASH memory Send set save params Receive set save params ok Thermo Fisher Scientific Communications Configuration Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration time This command reports the current time 24 hour format The following example reports that the internal time is 2 15 30 pm Send time Receive time 14 15 30 set time hh mm ss hh hours mm minutes ss seconds This command sets the internal clock 24 hour format The following example sets the internal time to 2 15 pm Note If seconds are omitted the seconds default to 00 A Send set time 14 15 Receive set time 14 15 ok addr dns This command reports the TCP IP address for the domain name server Send addr dns Receive addr dns 192 168 1 1 set
54. on page 8 9 Hardware Model 51 hardware components Figure 8 1 include Thermo Fisher Scientific Flame Ionization Detector FID Sample Filter Internal Pump Sample Pressure Regulator Electronic Pressure Controllers Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Zero Span Solenoids Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 1 System Description Hardware Flame lonization Sample Pressure Detector FID Regulator Sample Filter Input Board i py Air Bulkhead Electronic Pressure Fuel Solenoid Controls MESE Zero Span Lor Solenoids a LEX 2 A CN optional Thermistor AA A AA Fan Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Power Supply Transformer Pump Motherboard 100 and 220 V option only Figure 8 1 Hardware Components High Temperature 8 2 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Hardware Flame lonization Sample Pressure Detector FID Regulator Sample Filter Input Board a Air Bulkhead Electronic Pressure i Fuel Solenoid Controls d A Zero Span H j Solenoids optional Thermistor B Fan Measurement Interface Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Power Supply Transformer Pump Motherboard 100 and 220 V option only Figure 8 2 Hardware Components Low Temperature Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instructio
55. part of a bitfield specification is optional The bitfield will be one bit long starting in this case at the eleventh bit Background 7f 8Bd ddd set 03 bkg s n This shows the use of indirect precision specifiers for floating point displays The background value is taken from the 7th element and the precision specifier is taken from the 8th If the asterisk were not present it would indicate instead that 8 digits after the decimal point should be displayed Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual B 53 Serial Communication Parameters Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix C MODBUS Protocol This appendix provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The MODBUS commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The MODBUS protocol support for the iSeries enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and other measurement values read the status of the digital outputs of the analyzer and to trigger or simulate the activation of a digital input to the instrument This is achieved by using the supported MODBUS parameters listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 51i MODBUS Protocol specification see the following topics e Serial Communication Parameters on page C 1 e TCP Communication Paramete
56. parts of the detector onto the upper base Carefully place the detector cover over the stack of pieces Be certain to orient the detector cover properly on the upper detector base Otherwise the FID air holes will not line up and no FID air will flow Screw the upper detector base onto the detector cover Screw the signal and bias pogo assemblies back into the detector cover Feed the signal and bias pogo assemblies through the oven wall clearance holes and position the detector over the base Screw the detector assembly down to the lower base remembering to re connect the ignitor ground wire with one of the screws Place a new o ring into the hole on top of the detector and replace the thermocouple retainer loosely Insert the flame sensor thermocouple and tighten the two screws until snug Rotate the sensor while inserting it through the o ring to avoid cutting the rubber Re install the ignitor if necessary and re connect the ignitor power cable Re connect the bias and signal cables to the correct locations Re connect the exhaust vent tube to the detector Note Following an FID rebuild the instrument requires a burn in time of 48 to 72 hours The instrument can be used during burn in but requires more frequent calibration A Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 47 Servicing Detector Rebuilding Figure 7 19 Rebuilding the Detector 7 48 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Internal Sampl
57. refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 4 Wait at least 10 seconds for the ambient reading to stabilize use e Jand f to enter the known temperature and P press to save the temperature value 5 Install the cover Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 35 Servicing Pressure Controller Replacement Pressure Controller Replacement A 7 36 Model 51 Instruction Manual Use the following procedure to replace the support gas pressure controllers Figure 7 16 Equipment Required Replacement pressure controller air fuel or back pressure Philips screwdriver Wrench open end 1 4 inch Wrench open end 5 16 inch Wrench open end 3 8 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Disconnect the RJ 45 cables from all three pressure controllers Note the location of the connectors to facilitate re connection Disconnect the tubing supporting all three controllers Note the location of the tubing to facilitate re connection Loosen the captive screw holding the controller bracket to the oven wall and remove the controller assembly Remove the screws from the back of the controller s to be replaced and remove the contro
58. screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Lock Instrument If the instrument is locked via the front panel using Password Lock Instrument the instrument reports being in Remote mode In this mode the front panel is locked where data can be viewed settings can be viewed but not changed using the front panel interface and the remote Set commands are active If the instrument keyboard is unlocked via the front panel using Password Unlock Instrument the instrument reports being in Local mode the front panel interface is unlocked and settings can be changed from the front panel Refer to C Link Protocol Commands appendix for detailed information about mode allow mode and power up mode commands The Change Password screen is used to change the password used to unlock the instrument s front panel The change password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked e Inthe Main Menu choose Password gt Change Password Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password Menu Remove Password The Remove Password screen is used to erase the current password and disable password protection The remove password screen is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is set e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Remove Password Unlock Instrument The Unlock Instrument screen is used to enter the password to unlock the front panel
59. scrubbers do not remove methane and will not generate good quality zero gas For applications that involve taking measurements at high concentrations less expensive zero gas cylinders with THC levels certified as less than 1 ppm are often adequate This grade of zero air is readily available from gas suppliers at somewhat reduced cost and should be adequate for many source monitoring applications The instrument can be spanned with virtually any stable mixture of a hydrocarbon in an inert balance gas In most cases the instrument will be calibrated with methane in air when used for ambient monitoring and with propane in air or propane in nitrogen when used for source applications Model 51i Instruction Manual 4 3 Calibration Selecting Calibration Gases Selecting Span Gas Concentration Response Factors and Choice of Concentration 4 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Units The choice of hydrocarbon is usually based on factors such as availability or regulatory considerations and the balance gas should be selected to match the zero gas For those applications that involve measurement of a known specific hydrocarbon the best span gas is a mixture that contains that specific compound For example if the instrument is used for measuring toluene emissions from a printing operation a span gas containing toluene will produce the most accurate results When selecting a span gas the operator must be aware that the detector respon
60. selected output channel Configuration choices include selecting range setting minimum maximum values and choosing the signal to output e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config All Voltage Channels All Current Channels Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 ERE ES D ITE DH DIEM PEUPCEN E UO Md EOSGROGUPSIQZO A d The Select Range screen is used to select the hardware range for the selected analog output channel Possible ranges for the voltage outputs are 0 100 mV 0 1 0 5 and 0 10 V Possible ranges for the current outputs are 0 20 mA and 4 20 mA e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Select Range Thermo Fisher Scientific Minimum and Maximum Thermo Fisher Scientific Value Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Minimum and Maximum Value screens are used to edit the zero 0 and full scale 100 values respectively in percentages for the selected analog output channel See Table 3 3 for a list of choices Pump temperature is only available in the HT Model The minimum and maximum output value screens function the same way The following example shows the set minimum value screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls IO Configuration Analog Output Config select Channel Set Minimum or Maximum Value POE Praia ae Table
61. serves as a central location to tie the three connectors required for the function key panel the graphics display control lines and the graphics display backlight to a single ribbon cable extending back to the motherboard This board also includes signal buffers for the graphics display control signals and a high voltage power supply for the graphics display backlight Thermo Fisher Scientific 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Outputs Analog Current Outputs Optional Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components External I O is driven from a generic bus that is capable of controlling the following devices e Analog output voltage and current e Analog input voltage e Digital output TTL levels e Digital input TTL levels Note The instrument has spare solenoid valve drivers and I O support for future expansion A The instrument provides six analog voltage outputs Each may be firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 12 bits e 0 100 mV e 0 1V e 0 5V e 0 10 V The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter The voltage outputs are independent of the c
62. set display mode mode mode normal statistics This command sets the display mode to either normal or statistics The following example sets the display mode to normal Send set display mode normal Receive set display mode normal ok gas mode This command reports the current state of the zero span valves gas mode as sample zero or span The following example reports that the gas mode is sample Send gas mode Receive gas mode sample set sample This command sets the zero span valves to the sample mode The following example sets the instrument to sample mode that is the instrument is reading sample gas Send set sample Receive set sample ok set zero This command sets the zero span valves to the zero mode The following example sets the instrument to zero mode that is the instrument is reading Zero gas Send set zero Receive set zero ok Model 51i Instruction Manual B 31 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration Hardware Configuration B 32 Model 51i Instruction Manual set span This command sets the zero span valves to the span mode The following example sets the instrument to span mode that is the instrument is reading span gas Send set span Receive set span ok gas unit This command reports the current gas units ppm ppb ug m mg m 96 or ppmc The following example reports that the gas units are set to ppb Send gas unit Receive gas unit ppb set gas unit unit un
63. the two screws on the top of the detector and lift the flame sensor thermocouple straight out of the detector top 12 Re install the power cord turn the main power ON and wait for the Run screen to appear 13 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics FID Status The FID Status screen appears Note Since the fuel is off the flame should not light but the ignitor pulsing should be clearly visible through the hole in the top of the detector A CAUTION Due to the possibility of residual fuel in the detector keep your face away from the FID The ignitor pulse is clearly visible from a distance when the thermocouple has been removed A 14 If the ignitor is pulsing correctly shut the instrument power OFF replace the flame sensor thermocouple and re install the oven cover Tape the connector of the spare ignitor if replaced to the floor plate Note If the replacement ignitor does not appear to be functioning please call the service center for further instruction A For the FID to operate correctly a bias of approximately 280 to 300 volts is applied to the detector jet If the bias fails the FID produces weak signals excessive drift high noise poor sensitivity or poor reproducibility The voltage is supplied by circuitry located on the measurement interface board Use the following procedure to check the detector bias voltage Equipment Required Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 41 Servicing Removing the Detector
64. these menus usel t Jand Y jto move the cursor up and down to each item Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 1 Operation Pushbuttons gt o 3 o Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Pushbutto nS ThePushbuttons allow the user to traverse the various screens menus Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons 3 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Soft Keys Operation Pushbuttons Table 3 1 lists the front panel pushbuttons and their functions Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons Key Name Function E Soft Keys The E soft keys are used to provide shortcuts that allow the user to jump to user selectable menu screens For more information on processing soft keys see Soft Keys below Cr Run The Cr is used to display the Run screen The Run screen normally displays the current THC concentration Cm Menu The Cm is used to display the Main Menu when in the Run screen or back up one level in the menu system For more information about the Main Menu see Main Menu later in this chapter 2 Help The 2 is context sensitive that is it provides additional information about the screen that is being displayed Press 2 for a bri
65. to 45 to 50 psig and consumption will be approximately 100 to 130 ml per minute The 51 requires a pressurized source of combustion air to support the FID flame and also to provide back pressure that is used to control and stabilize the sample flow into the detector Air can be supplied from cylinders or can be generated on site In either case the combustion air should be dry and particle free to prevent contamination of the analyzer As with the fuel the hydrocarbon content will impact the analyzer s performance and for ambient or trace level monitoring high purity THC free air will be required For additional discussion of air quality see Chapter 4 Calibration in this manual The combustion air cylinder regulator should be set to 45 to 50 psig Consumption is approximately 250 to 350 ml per minute If the internal zero and span valves will be used the zero air and span gas cylinder regulators should be set to 10 psig The cylinder pressure controls the calibration gas flow rate so it might be necessary to adjust the cylinder pressures For more information refer to Chapter 4 Calibration The sample line is connected to the sample port inlet on the Model 51 with 1 4 inch OD tubing The sample line can be up to 200 feet without significantly compromising the sample flow rate If the sample is drawn from a source that operates under strong negative pressure or if the sample line is more than 200 feet long an external pump shou
66. to 60 psi Thermo Fisher Scientific Set the Sample Pressure Set the Combustion Air Thermo Fisher Scientific Pressure Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Turn off any calibration gas supplies entering the instrument and relieve the pressure Make sure the manual air pressure regulator that is mounted to the oven is set to approximately 20 psi From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Select Fuel gt Mixed From the Main Menu choose Service Set Pressure and Flow For more information see Set Pressure and Flow in Chapter 3 Operation From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Gas Pressures Mixed Fuel Run Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 125 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Mixed Fuel Ignite Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 110 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Sample Run Set the pressure to create a sample air flow of 15 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow scre
67. type for the selected record type whether the data should be averaged over the interval the minimum or maximum measured during the interval or the current value last value measured Data treatment doesn t apply to all data just to the concentration measurement All other data points log the current value at the end of the interval Note This feature is found in all Series instruments but it is recommended that the data type be set to ONLY the current value cur The 517 already has a means of logging average minimum or maximum concentrations See Datalogging Settings Select Content earlier in this chapter A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Configure Datalogging Data Treatment Communication The Communication Settings menu is used for communications control 8 Settings and configuration e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings 3 30 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Co pb Rebel Serial Settings The Serial Setting submenu is used for serial communications control and configuration e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Baud Rate The Baud Rate screen is used to set the RS 232 RS 485 interface baud rate Baud rates of 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 are available The analyzer s default baud ra
68. 0 C Link command to set the screen contrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See contrast levels in Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands for more information on this command A Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Screen Contrast ERED ELP EN Pria iri Service Mode The Service Mode screen is used to turn the service mode on or off Turning service mode ON locks out any remote actions and allows access to parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustments or diagnosing the Model 517 The service wrench icon on the status bar is shown when service mode is on For more information about the service mode see Service Menu later in this chapter Note The service mode should be turned off when finished as it prevents remote operation A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Service Mode EDEIZE MATTE Date Time The Date Time screen allows the user to view and change the system date and time 24 hour format The internal clock is powered by its own battery when instrument power is off e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Date Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 51 Operation Diagnostics Menu EDEIZE Pria p Timezone The Timezone screen is used to set the timezone for the Network Time Protocol NTP server This should be set to the timez
69. 0 Reply Termination Formats Format Reply Termination 00 lt CR gt 01 lt NL gt sum xxxx lt CR gt where xxxx 4 hexadecimal digits that represent the sum of all the characters bytes in the message host name This command reports the host name string The following example reports the host name is set to Series Send host name Receive host name iSeries set host name string This command sets the host name string where string is 1 13 alphanumeric characters The following example sets the host name to analyzer01 Send set host name analyzeroi Receive set host name analyzer01 ok instr name This command reports the instrument name The following example reports the instrument name for the Model 512 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration Send instr name Receive instr name Total Hydrocarbon Analyzer THC Analyzer instrument id This command reports the instrument identification ID The following example reports the current setting of the instrument ID Send instrument id Receive instrument id 51 set instrument id value This command sets the instrument ID to value where value is an integer between 0 and 127 inclusive The following example shows the instrument ID changed to 52 Note Sending this command via RS 232 or RS 485 will require the host to use the new ID for subsequent commands A Send set instrument id 52 Receive set in
70. 0x0D lt STX gt is abbreviation for Start of Text ASCII code 0x02 lt ETX gt is abbreviation for End of Text ASCII code 0x03 SP is abbreviation for space ASCII code 0x20 The following is the basic structure of a Geysitech command STX Command text lt ETX gt lt BCC gt OR STX Command text lt CR gt Each command is framed by control characters STX at the start and terminated with either lt ETX gt or CR If a command is terminated with lt ETX gt then two additional characters lt BCC gt is attached after lt ETX gt This is the block checksum Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt may be added to the command to prevent processing invalid commands Thermo Fisher Scientific Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt Geysitech Commands Instrument Control Command Thermo Fisher Scientific ST Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Block Checksum Characters lt BCC gt The Block Checksum Characters are calculated beginning with a seed value of 00000000 binary 0x00 and bitwise exclusive ORing with each of the characters of the command string or response including the framing characters lt STX gt and lt ETX gt The checksum works as an error check The command terminator determines the presence or absence of lt BCC gt If a command is terminated by lt ETX gt then the next two characters are the checksum if the command is terminated with CR no checksum is attached The block
71. 3 3 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value THC Zero 0 Range Setting AVG THC Zero 0 Range Setting HI THC Zero 0 Range Setting LO THC Zero 0 Range Setting Detector Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Filter Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Pump Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Flame Temp 150 C min 300 C max Internal Temp User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Air Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 45 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 46 Choose Signal to Output Model 51 Instruction Manual Output Zero 0 Value Full Scale 100 Value Sample Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Fuel Pressure User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Raw Signal User set alarm min value User set alarm max value Everything Else 0 Units 10 Units The Choose Signal to Output screen displays a list of the analog output signal choices Choices are grouped into three categories Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed This allows the user to select the output signal that will be assigned to each analog channel The Concentrations screen is shown below See Table 3 4 below for a list of items for each signal group cho
72. 3 6 RSC J EN ODE adas 3 6 Main Menu aes lada 3 7 Range Men th ss cod A serbe eis ee ders ln aes 3 8 Concentration Units eese eene ennemi 3 8 Select Range cu aestate E ect te deri luce 3 9 Set Custoim Ranges iii 3 11 Custom Ranges coded inire od Ee dd 3 11 Averaging Vii 3 11 Calibration Factors Mea o 3 12 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51 Instruction Manual v Contents vi Model 51i Instruction Manual BACKS LO UII aseo satietate GE ups etd 3 12 Coefficient 3 13 Reset User Calibration Defaults iii 3 14 Calibration Menu 15 itn t trie tente reb t tne st c eo Ped ds 3 14 Calibrate Backeronnd uade ated cate ab acinar 3 14 Calibrate CGH iC leit a eines pecu dover dii ia Di ect dede 3 15 Calibration History E Coups pao 3 15 Lieto Span heces ai eee ied onte the cepe editt ne reete 3 16 Next TIME e 3 17 Period FAO UTS Hcg odi tria cates update pica 3 17 A notte ta uen 3 17 ZerolSpan Purge Duration Minutes 2 ettet eet etos 3 17 Zero Span Averaging Time di iet ond cites eins 3 18 Zero Span Calibration Reset ion neta 3 18 ZerolSpai IN ACID onu aetate qt O 3 19 Instrument Controls Meninas 3 19 SeE Display A t cde vate qu Lo tuU 3 19 Set Oven Lemperatuleuuassequiteqii meses iana 3 20 Gas Press resis og ass eco es ia 3 20 Select BLEU aoc acwotpacadvaserskqoes ceeidsvensvented statue bishred aus 3 21 Response Pacto ida ead sa Un qua Materie Ead 3 21 O 3 22 Datalopging Sett
73. 32 LIGHT BLUE VIOLET 15 RED WHITE 33 LIGHT BLUE BLACK 16 ORANGE WHITE 34 GRAY GREEN 17 GREEN WHITE 35 GRAY RED 18 BLUE WHITE 36 GRAY VIOLET 19 VIOLET WHITE oy LIGHT GREEN BLACK Mounting Options The analyzer can be installed in the configuration described in Table 9 3 and shown in Figure 9 1 through Figure 9 4 Thermo Fisher Scientific Table 9 3 Mounting Options Mounting Type Description Bench Positioned on bench includes mounting feet and front panel side trim handles EIA rack Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel ElA rack mounting handles Retrofit rack Mounted in an ElA style rack includes mounting slides and front panel EIA rack mounting handles This configuration is intended for direct replacement of a C series instrument in an existing rack The rail mounting location is lower on the case and the front mounting screw slots have non standard EIA locations Model 51i Instruction Manual 9 3 Optional Equipment Mounting Options 16 75 REF Figure 9 1 Bench Mounting 9 4 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 9 5 Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting 9 6 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Optional Equipment Mounting Options Figure 9 4 Rack
74. 34 Table B 10 Reply Termination Formats sssssssssssee B 40 Table B 11 Allow Mode Command Values sssssss B 42 Table B 12 Power up Mode Values ssssssssssee B 43 Table B 13 Set Layout Ack Values B 43 Table B 14 Analog Current Output Range Values B 44 Table B 15 Analog Voltage Output Range Values B 45 Table B 16 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments B 47 Table C 1 Read Coils TOEOTIS ade ete e er te t ab to ped C 8 Table C 2 Read Registers for 51i C 10 Table C 3 Write Coils for rra te tet tob teta ttes C 11 Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 51i D 7 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 517 D 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 1 Introduction The Model 51 Total Hydrocarbon THC Analyzer combines proven Flame Ionization Detector FID technology easy to use menu driven firmware and advanced diagnostics to offer unsurpassed flexibility and reliability The Model 517 is available in Low Temperature and High Temperature versions and has the following features 320 x 240 graphics display Menu driven firmware Temperature controlled detector oven and sampling system Automatic ranging Multiple user defined analog outputs Analog input options Reporting of alarm conditions Flame out detection and automatic re ignition User programmable report generation User select
75. 40 C 4096 Hydrogen Helium fuel 200 to 400 C Oven Temperature LT 120 to 135 C Base Pump or Filter HT 5 of Set Point Sample Pressure 0 5 psi of Set Point Fuel Pressure 15 to 50 psi 1 0 psi of Set Point Air Pressure 15 to 50 psi 1 0 psi of Set Point 5 Volt Supply 4 7 to 5 3 Volts 15 Volt Supply 14 to 16 Volts 15 Volt Supply 15 7 to 14 2 Volts 12 Volt Supply 11 2 to 12 8 Volts Bias 261 to 339 Volts The troubleshooting guides presented in this chapter are designed to help isolate and identify instrument problems Table 6 2 provides general troubleshooting information and indicates the checks that you should perform if you experience an instrument problem Table 6 3 lists all the alarm messages you may see on the graphics display and provides recommendations about how to resolve the alarm condition See Alarms Menu in the Operation chapter for detailed information Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide Malfunction Possible Cause Action Does not start up the No power Check the line to confirm that power is display backlight is available and that it matches the voltage and off and nothing is on frequency configuration of the instrument the display Main fuse is blown Unplug the power cord to the analyzer open the or missing fuse drawer on the back panel and check fuses visually or with a multimeter Bad switch or wiring Unplug the power cord to the analyzer connection disconnect the swit
76. 485 to Spare Board RS485 to Spare Board 1 0 J5 o CO N oon A CO N gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a A 99 N BR M DN HBO n M N C a A Co N gt Q Power Fail Relay N C Contact Ground TTL Input 1 TTL Input 2 Ground TTL Input 5 TTL Input 7 TTL Input 8 TTL Input 10 Ground TTL Input 13 TTL Input 15 Ground Analog Voltage Output 1 Analog Voltage Output 3 Ground Analog Voltage Output 5 Ground Ground Power Fail Relay COM Power Fail Relay N O Contact Ground TTL Input 3 TTL Input 4 TTL Input 6 Ground Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 11 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator 27 TTL Input 9 28 TTL Input 11 29 TTL Input 12 30 TTL Input 14 31 TTL Input 16 32 Ground 33 Analog Voltage Output 2 34 Analog Voltage Output 4 35 Ground 36 Analog Voltage Output 6 37 Ground SER EN J7 Serial Enable Jumper 2 3 3V 24V IN J10 24V 2 Ground DIGITAL OUTPUT J14 5V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 SPI Reset 8 SPI Input 9 SPI Output 10 SPI Board Select 11 SPI Clock EXT RS485 J15 1 RS485 to Rear Panel 2 RS485 to Rear Panel 3 5V 4 5V 5 5V 6 Ground 7 Ground 8 Ground 6 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin gt gt gt gt gt al 99 N Tr
77. 5 0 C Send alarm internal temp min Receive alarm internal temp min 15 0 deg C set alarm internal temp min value set alarm internal temp max value These commands set the internal temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the internal temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the internal temperature alarm maximum value to 45 C Send set alarm internal temp max 45 Receive set alarm internal temp max 45 ok alarm pressure air min alarm pressure air max These commands report the current air pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the air pressure alarm minimum value is 3 0 psi Send alarm pressure air min Receive alarm pressure air min 3 0 psi set alarm pressure air min value set alarm pressure air max value These commands set the air pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the air pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the air pressure alarm maximum value to 32 psi Send set alarm pressure air max 32 Receive set alarm pressure air max 32 ok alarm pressure fuel min alarm pressure fuel max These commands report the current fuel pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the fuel pressure alarm minimum value is 5 3 psi Send alarm pressur
78. 60 that combine compression chemical scrubbing and reaction into one self contained device In these systems ambient air that has been compressed is dried by passage through a heatless air dryer or membrane drier and is then sent through a series of chemical reactors and or scrubbers Normally the scrubbers include indicating silica gel or Drierite to remove traces of water Purafil activated charcoal and a fine 5 micron particulate filter If a zero air generator of this type will be used the operator should be aware that optimal performance might not be achieved until the generator has been run for 24 to 48 hours This occurs because the impurities can desorb from the chemical reactors during the initial operation However after 24 to 48 hours of continuous operation impurity levels will generally fall and stabilize below detection limits for trace level analyzers When using this type of zero air source it is critical to always maintain some minimal flow through the system If flow is interrupted even for a short period a reconditioning time of up to 24 hours may be required One advantage of using an on site generator is that the system that supplies zero air can also be used to provide the FID support air Use of a high quality zero air generator may also provide other advantages including reduced FID noise levels and reduced operating cost Be aware however that non catalytic systems using activated charcoal or molecular sieve
79. 7 12 Replacing the Input Board 1 26 Figure 7 13 Replacing the DC Power Supply sss 1 28 Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins 1 30 Figure 7 15 Replacing the Thermistor sss 7 34 Figure 7 16 Replacing the Pressure Controllers sss 1 37 Figure 7 17 Replacing the Pressure Regulator 1 38 Model 51 Instruction Manual xv Figures xvi Model 51i Instruction Manual Figure 7 18 Removing the Detector 7 44 Figure 7 19 Rebuilding the Detector ccc cecesescecetesesestetesesesteteseseees 7 48 Figure 7 20 Replacing the 0 Expansion Board Optional 7 58 Figure 7 21 Rear Panel Board Connectors sss 7 59 Figure 7 22 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board 7 62 Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module 7 63 Figure 8 1 Hardware Components High Temperature 8 2 Figure 8 2 Hardware Components Low Temperature 8 3 Figure 9 1 Bench MOUNtINY oocooconicinincnocncnnnconononononocoronnononornnnononorannonororannoos 9 4 Figure 9 2 EIA Rack Mounting sss 9 5 Figure 9 3 Retrofit Rack Mounting sene 9 6 Figure 9 4 Rack Mount Option Assembly ssssssssssses 9 7 Figure B 14 Flags Felge a
80. ATO DH DUM ni A AS 3 48 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Number of Table Points The Number of Table Points screen allows the user to select how many points are used in the analog input conversion table for the selected channel The instrument uses linear interpolation between the points in this table to determine what the reading value is based on the analog input voltage Each point in the table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs The points range from 2 to 10 with a default of 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Table Points EPEE E uee boose mut Table Points The Table Point submenu allows the user to set up an individual table point e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt Point 1 10 CREED OS Cum PTE oe PATI END DHOBM PPP L Evi bi i i Volts The Volts screen allows the user to set the input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 0 00 to 10 50 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of me
81. All voltage inputs have a resolution of 12 bits over the range of 0 to 10 volts The instrument includes one power fail relay on the motherboard and ten digital output relays on the digital output board These are reed relays rated for at least 500 mA 200 VDC The power fail relay is Form C both normally opened and normally closed contacts All other relays are Form A normally opened contacts and are used to provide alarm status and mode information from the analyzer as well as remote control to other devices such as for controlling valves during calibration The user may select what information is sent out from each relay and whether the active state is opened or closed Sixteen digital inputs are available which may be programmed to signal instrument modes and special conditions including e Zero Mode opens zero solenoid e Span Mode opens span solenoid e Set Background sets zero e Cal to span sets span coefficient e Analog outputs to zero e Analog outputs to full scale e Set Idle Mode The actual use of these inputs will vary based on analyzer configuration The digital inputs are TTL level compatible and are pulled up within the analyzer The active state can be user defined in the firmware Thermo Fisher Scientific Serial Ports RS 232 Connection Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description 1 0 Components Two serial ports allow daisy chaining so that multiple analyzers may be linked using one PC se
82. C lining up the screw holes as you re assemble Note that if one side of the diaphragm is brown that side should be facing down 8 Place the threaded boss of the clamping disk G through the holes in the two new diaphragms H the connecting rod disk and shim disks P and thread it into the hex piece Tighten the clamping disk using the needle nose pliers until snug but do not over tighten Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 17 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version 7 18 Model 51i Instruction Manual 10 1l 12 13 14 15 16 17S Place the intermediate plate B over the diaphragm using the marks that were made in Step 2 to line up the parts Place the new valve plate E on top of the intermediate plate B orienting the valve flaps with the holes If the valve plate has one side that is brown that side should be down Place the head plate A on top of the valve plate E again using the marks made in step 2 to line up the components Be sure that all components are centered Position 6 cup washers L over each stud oriented as shown in the diagram then place the flat washers on the studs Tighten the 4 head nuts D in a crisscross pattern to a snug fit but do not over tighten If you are replacing the fittings on the head plate remove any old Teflon tape and carefully apply two layers of new tape to the fitting threads Do not substitute any other type of tape and be sure that the Te
83. Description Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other ketone based or aromatic solvent to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply within the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his or her Own expense A The following symbol and description identify the WEEE marking used on the instrument and in the associated documentation Symbol Description Marking of electrical and electronic equipment which applies to waste electrical and electronic equipment falling under the Directive 2002 96 EC EA WEEE and the equipment that
84. Detail A Detail B onnector Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views Table 2 3 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 Relay1 ContactA 13 Relay7_ContactA 2 Relay1_ContactB 14 Relay7_ContactB 3 Relay2_ContactA 15 Relay8_ContactA 4 Relay2_ContactB 16 Relay8_ContactB 5 Relay3_ContactA 17 Relay8 ContactA 6 Relay3 ContactB 18 Relay9_ContactB 7 Relay4_ContactA 19 Relay10_ContactA 8 Relay4_ContactB 20 Relay10_ContactB 9 Relay5_ContactA 21 not used 10 Relay5_ContactB 22 24V 11 Relay6 ContactA 23 not used 12 Relay6 ContactB 24 24V The 25 pin terminal board is included with the optional I O Expansion Board Figure 2 7 shows the recommended method for attaching the cable customer supplied to the terminal board using the included tie down and spacer Table 2 4 identifies the connector pins and associated signals Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices See Detail A E See Detail B Detail A Detail B Assembled Connector Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views Table 2 4 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions Screw Signal Description Screw Signal Description 1 lOut1 13 Analog In1 2 Isolated ground 14 Analog In2 3 IOut2 15 Analog In3 4 Isolated ground 16 Ground 5 IOut3 17 Analog In4 6 Isolated ground 18 Analog Inb5 7 lOut4 19 Analog_In6 8 Isolated gro
85. First deposits on the tip of the jet plate and inner bore of the collector can be removed with a fine emery cloth b Place the detector cover upper detector base all three Teflon pieces the flat and wavy washers the collector assembly and the jet plate into the beaker and immerse in detergent solution If possible ultrasonic agitation is recommended for five to ten minutes otherwise just stir vigorously c Rinse all the parts with large amounts of clean water and set the Teflon pieces aside on a clean towel to dry Rinse ONLY the metal with acetone or methanol d Ifthe detector base has been cleaned blow out any remaining liquid from the gas feed lines with clean compressed air or nitrogen Always apply pressure to the fitting end of the tube rather than the holes in the base e If possible dry all the pieces in an oven at 175 C for an hour and allow them to cool before reassembling Allow the pieces to dry overnight if no oven is available Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Servicing Detector Rebuilding Place the wavy washer flat washer and o ring into the detector cover The o ring will hold the other pieces in place Place new o rings into the two channels on the lower detector base Place a new o ring onto the bottom of the jet plate around the jet tube and one onto the upper detector base Re assemble the remaining internal
86. Fisher Scientific External Device Connection Components Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 101033 00 AC from Receptacle 101377 00 AC to Power Switch 104631 00 Signal Ribbon 103905 00 Heater Power 103682 00 Detector Signal Cable Table 7 3 lists the standard and optional cables and components used for connecting external devices such as PCs and dataloggers to an iSeries instrument Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components Part Number Description 102562 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB25 optional 102556 00 Terminal Block and Cable Kit DB37 optional 102645 00 Cable DB37M to Open End Cable Six Feet optional 102646 00 Cable DB37F to Open End Six Feet optional 102659 00 Cable DB25M to Open End Six Feet optional 6279 Cable RS 232 optional 102888 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37F standard with all instruments 102891 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB37M standard with all instruments 103084 00 Terminal Board PCB Assembly DB25M optional Included with optional 1 0 Expansion Board in all instruments Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 7 Servicing External Device Connection Components Fame lonization Detector FID Sample Pressure Regulator Sample Filter Input Board Electronic Pressure Controls Thermistor I Measurement Inte
87. Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Send erec Receive erec 10 05 01 04 07 flags 8530000 THC 3 137 THC Avg 0 551 THC High 4 098 THC Low 1 479 4 avgtime 10 Sample PSI 4 800 airpres 18 940 Fuel PSI 19 008 Int Temp 027 200 Flame Temp 188 703 ovenset 125 Det Temp 124 908 Filt Temp 124 823 lrec srec lrec xxxx yy srec xxxx yy lrec aa bb oo pp qq yy srec aa bb oo pp qq yy xxxx the number of past records yy the number of records to return 1 to 10 aa hours 01 to 23 bb minutes 01 to 59 00 month 01 to 12 pp day 01 to 31 qq year These commands output lrecs or srecs and erec data The output format is determined by the set Irec format and set srec format commands The logging time is determined by the set Irec per and set srec per commands In the following example assume there are 740 lrecs currently stored in memory When the command lrec 100 5 is sent the instrument counts back 100 records from the last record collected record 740 and then returns 5 records 640 641 642 643 and 644 For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see Figure B 1 Send lrec 100 5 Receive lrec 100 5 08 30 01 03 07 flags 8530000 THC 0 189 THC Avg 0 126 THC High 1 119 THC Low 2 889 Det Temp 124 884 Filt Temp 125 067 Flame Temp 200 077 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 14 427 Sample PSI 2 064 Fuel PSI 25 326 08 45 01 03 07 f
88. HC reading to zero 3 14 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibrate Coefficient Calibration History Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Calibration Menu It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating In general the longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be For most applications the 30 second averaging time is adequate For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Cal Background The Calibrate Coefficient screen is used to adjust the THC reading while sampling span gas of known concentration Before making an adjustment be sure the analyzer samples span gas until the reading stabilizes The display shows the current THC reading The next line of the display is where the span gas concentration is entered Press to save the new calibration coefficient It is important to note the averaging time when calibrating In general the longer the averaging time the more accurate the calibration will be For most applications the 30 second averaging time will be adequate For more information about calibration see Chapter 4 Calibration e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Cal Coef EH DHOBM PLI The Calibration History screen is a list of diagnostic data from the 5 most recent calibrations This includes date and time of calibration the type of calibration activity the
89. HCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Netmask Default Gateway The Default Gateway screen is used to edit the gateway address The default gateway can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above Any traffic to addresses that are not on the local subnet will be routed through this address e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings T CP IP Settings Gateway Host Name The Host Name screen is used to edit the host name When DHCP is enabled this name is reported to the DHCP server e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Host Name 3 38 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Network Time Protocol Server 1 0 Configuration Output Relay Settings Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu The Network Time Protocol NTP Server screen is used to edit the IP address of the NTP server An NTP server may be used to periodically synchronize the instrument s real time clock with a standard More information about the NTP servers and a list of public servers may be found at http www ntp org e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Commun
90. ICULAR RESULT A 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Identification Thermo Fisher Scientific Number Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands This appendix provides a description of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control a Model 51 analyzer using a host device such as a PC or a datalogger C Link protocol may be used over RS 232 RS 485 or Ethernet C Link functions can be accessed over Ethernet using TCP port 9880 Streaming data is sent out the serial port or the Ethernet port on a user defined periodic basis Streaming data over Ethernet is only generated when a connection is made on TCP port 9881 Up to three simultaneous connections per protocol may be made over Ethernet For details see the following topics e Instrument Identification Number on page B 1 e Commands on page B 2 e Measurements on page B 9 e Alarms on page B 11 e Diagnostics on page B 17 e Datalogging on page B 18 e Calibration on page B 27 e Keys Display on page B 28 e Measurement Configuration on page B 30 e Hardware Configuration on page B 32 e Communications Configuration on page B 37 e I O Configuration on page B 44 e Record Layout Definition on page B 49 Each command sent to the analyzer over the serial port must begin with the American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASCII symbol or byte value equivalent to the instrumen
91. Main Menu choose Service Analog Out Cal The Analog Output Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 3 At the Analog Output Cal menu press 4 to scroll to the desired voltage channel or current channel corresponding to the rear panel terminal pin where the meter is connected then press With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press The Analog Output Cal line displays Zero Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 31 Servicing Analog Input Calibration Analog Input Calibration Calibrating the Input Channels to Zero Volts 7 32 Model 51i Instruction Manual Note When calibrating the analog output always calibrate zero first and then calibrate full scale A 5 Use until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line 0 0 V or 0 0 or 4 0 mA then press to save the value 6 Press Cm to return to the previous screen 7 Press to select Calibrate Full Scale 8 Use Ce until the meter reads the value shown in the Set Output To line then press to save the value Use the following procedures to calibrate the analog inputs after replacing the optional I O expansion board These procedures include selecting analog input channels calibrating them to zero volts and then calibrating them to full scale using a known voltage source Use the following procedure to calibrate the
92. Model 51 Instruction Manual Total Hydrocarbon Analyzer Part Number 103960 00 26Mar2012 C Thermo 2007 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc All rights reserved Specifications terms and pricing are subject to change Not all products are available in all countries Please consult your local sales representative for details Thermo Fisher Scientific WEEE Compliance This product is required to comply with the European Union s Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment WEEE Directive 2002 96 EC It is marked with the following symbol Thermo Fisher Scientific has contracted with one or more recycling disposal companies in each EU Member State and this product should be disposed of or recycled through them Further information on Thermo Fisher Scientific s compliance with these Directives the recyclers in your country and information on Thermo Fisher Scientific products which may assist the detection of substances subject to the RoHS Directive are available at www thermo com WEEEROHS WEEE Compliance Thermo Fisher Scientific About This Manual This manual provides information about installing operating maintaining and servicing the Model 51 analyzer It also contains important alerts to ensure safe operation and prevent equipment damage The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendices to provide direct access to specific operation and service information Chapter 1 Introduction pr
93. Module Replacement A A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing LCD Module Replacement LCD Module LCD Module Screws 2 Retaining Screw Front Panel Board Two Wire Connector ZR Bottom Support Figure 7 23 Replacing the Front Panel Board and the LCD Module Use the following procedure to replace the LCD module Figure 7 23 Equipment Required LCD module Philips screwdriver CAUTION If the LCD panel breaks do not let the liquid crystal contact your skin or clothes If the liquid crystal contacts your skin or clothes wash it off immediately using soap and water A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Do not remove the LCD panel or frame from the LCD module A The LCD polarizing plate is very fragile handle it carefully A Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 63 Servicing Service Locations Service Locations 7 64 Model 51i Instruction Manual Do not wipe the LCD polarizing plate with a dry cloth as it may easily scratch the plate A Do not use alcohol acetone MEK or other Ketone based or aromatic solvents to clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A 1 Turn the instrument OFF un
94. Mount Option Assembly Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 9 7 Thermo Fisher Scientific Appendix A Warranty Seller warrants that the Products will operate or perform substantially in conformance with Seller s published specifications and be free from defects in material and workmanship when subjected to normal proper and intended usage by properly trained personnel for the period of time set forth in the product documentation published specifications or package inserts If a period of time is not specified in Seller s product documentation published specifications or package inserts the warranty period shall be one 1 year from the date of shipment to Buyer for equipment and ninety 90 days for all other products the Warranty Period Seller agrees during the Warranty Period to repair or replace at Seller s option defective Products so as to cause the same to operate in substantial conformance with said published specifications provided that a Buyer shall promptly notify Seller in writing upon the discovery of any defect which notice shall include the product model and serial number if applicable and details of the warranty claim b after Seller s review Seller will provide Buyer with service data and or a Return Material Authorization RMA which may include biohazard decontamination procedures and other product specific handling instructions and c then if applicable Buyer may return the defec
95. ONER Son ACINPUT SUPPLY AC FRONT PANEL A PONERSW ASIA j zm I TRANSFORVER 1 1 o el 1 E pee 8OVAC or 240VAC Options laa rr mates 1 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific TO COMMON ELECTRONICS 51i 55i MEASUREMENT INTERFACE BOARD DATA gt J7 3 Pin 24V J6 2 Pin AC 3 Pin J23 J27 J26 J25 J24 J22 J21 J20 J19 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J12 J32 J11 J10 J9 J8 J5 J4 J3 10 Pin 3 Pin 7 Pin 6 Pin 5 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin Coax 2 Cond 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 2 Pin 3 Pin Troubleshooting Board Level Connection Diagrams INPUT BOARD Coax 2 Cond DETECTOR IGNITOR AND BIAS VOLTAGES TO DETECTOR BACK PRESSURE CONTROLLER FUEL PRESSURE CONTROLLER AIR PRESSURE CONTROLLER FUEL SOLENOID ZERO SOLENOID L SPAN1 SOLENOID SPAN2 SOLENOID w PUMP SOLENOID VENT SOLENOID NOT USED ON THE 51i AMBIENT TEMP THERM FLAME TC PUMP TC DET BASE TC FILTER TC MEAS OUTPUT NOT USED ZERO AIR HEATER ON THE 51i ZERO AIR PUMP FAN FAN AC 7 FILTER HEATER AC 7 DETECTOR HEATER ACT PUMP HEATER AC PUMP Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measuremen
96. SH B 36 save params Stores parameters in FLASH B 36 sc screen C series legacy command that reports a generic response B 29 Use iscreen instead sp field Reports sets item number and name in scratch pad list B 25 span Sets zero span valves to span mode B 32 span calibrate Sets THC coefficient B 27 span conc Reports sets span gas concentration B 28 sr Reports the last srec stored B 20 srec Reports maximum number of srecs B 21 srec format Reports sets output format for srecs ASCII or binary B 22 srec layout Reports current layout of srec data B 23 srec mem size Reports maximum number of srecs that can be stored B 23 srec per Reports sets srec logging period B 23 stream per Reports sets current time interval for streaming data B 26 stream time Reports sets a time stamp to streaming data or not B 26 the Reports current THC concentration B 11 the bkg Reports sets current THC background B 27 thc coef Reports sets current THC coefficient B 27 Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurements Command Description Page time Reports sets current time 24 hour format B 37 tz Reports sets the timezone string for the network time B 44 protocol server up Simulates pressing up pushbutton B 28 value Reports current THC concentration B 11 zero Sets zero span valves to zero mode B 31 zero calibrate Sets THC background B 27 avg time This command reports the concentration meas
97. T the ignition was successful go to step 2 If ignition fails verify that all gas flows are still at the levels set in the previous steps If so refer to Chapter 6 Troublshooting 2 Once the instrument has been successfully lit and the detector has thermally stabilized introduce a known concentration of span gas into the sample port at atmospheric pressure A suggested concentration would be 100 ppm methane in air 3 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Gas Pressures gt and the appropriate Hz or MIXED Fuel Run At the Set Pressure screen increase the pressure by 0 5 psi increments beginning from the initial stored value Observe the THC concentration reading at the top of the front panel display Notice an increase in the reported concentration level which directly corresponds to an increase in signal strength As the fuel pressure is increased the concentration readings will increase along a curve to reach a peak value then begin to decay toward zero with any additional increases in pressure The fuel pressure will be considered optimized when the concentration reading reaches the peak level Adjust the pressure up through the peak value and then reduce back to the peak value Record the peak pressure value and go to step 4 4 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Gas Pressures Air Run At the Set Pressure screen increase the pressure by 0 5 psi increments beginning from the initial stored value O
98. TA EH DHOBM U LPIHCHIL PP Xi ENSE ui i beet iu Analog Input Calibration The Analog Input Calibration menu is used to calibrate the 8 analog input channels at both zero and full scale The Analog Input Calibration menu is visible only when the I O expansion board is installed Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal ERED Du perm EH DHOBM Prid YU Lir Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 77 Operation Service Menu Analog Input Calibrate Zero Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale Display Pixel Test 3 78 Model 51i Instruction Manual The Analog Input Calibrate Zero screen allows the user to calibrate the zero state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal select Channel Calibrate Zero The Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale screen allows the user to calibrate the full scale state of the selected analog input e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Analog Input Cal select Channel Calibrate Full Scale Hook up a voltage source of 10 V to the analog input channel The Display Pixel Test screen is used to test the LCD display by toggling between all pixels on and all pixels off to ensure that they are functioning properly e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Display Pixel Test Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Password M
99. Teflon does not extend below the threads as excess tape may tear off and become lodged in the pump valves 8 Turn the motor fan or counterweight by hand to be sure that the pump runs freely 9 Re install the pump assembly by reversing the removal sequence used earlier and verify that all fittings and electrical connections are secure Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 23 Servicing Fan Filter Replacement 7 24 Fan Filter Replacement Model 51 Instruction Manual A Figure 7 10 Rebuilding the Pump Low Temp Version 10 Power up the instrument and turn the pump on Allow the instrument to come up to full operating temperature Verify that the pump is working correctly by checking the flow rate at the sample inlet bulkhead the pump should draw at least 700 cc per minute of sample and checking to see that the sample pressure reported in the Diagnostic menu is close to the set pressure Use the following procedure to replace the fan and the fan filter Figure 7 11 Equipment Required Fan Fan filter Philips screwdriver Cable cutter for tie wrap removal Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Input Board Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the fan guard and
100. Teflon or metal lines should be used Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific EXTERNAL 889 ACCESSORY 252 RS 232 485 LO ETHERNET POWER FAIL 9 2 RELAY DIGITAL INPUTS ANALOG VOLTAGE OUTPUTS Fuel 59 DIGITAL OUTPUTS Installation Connecting Support Gases Note Zero and span bulkheads are only present if the internal calibration valve option is installed A vo EXPANSION CAUTION FITTINGS ARE HOT prex NS 2 x INLET EXHAUST BY PASS D Far X Figure 2 2 Model 51 Rear Panel Flow of the fuel gas combustion air and sample gas are controlled by electronic pressure controllers and regulators within the Model 517 The internal pressure controllers and regulators are adjusted at the factory to provide proper flow rates Typical controller settings and consumption rates are given below Normally the instrument hardware maintains factory set flow rates automatically However should adjustment become necessary refer to the Servicing chapter for the procedure for adjusting gas flows Note Combustion air continues to flow if the Model 517 is turned off If the instrument is shut down for an extended period of time the combustion air should therefore be disconnected or turned off at the cylinder Although fuel flow and calibration gases are automatically stopped by the internal solenoids when the instrument power is shut off it is recommended that the cylinders
101. a universal switching supply which is capable of auto sensing the input voltage and working over the specified operating ranges of 100 to 240 VAC The internal pump and heaters all operate on 110 VAC An optional internal transformer is required if operating on the 210 250 VAC or 90 110 VAC ranges An on off switch controls all power to the analyzer and is accessible on the front panel Motherboard The motherboard contains the main processor power supplies and a sub processor and serves as the communication hub for the instrument The motherboard receives operator inputs from the front panel function keys and or over I O connections on the rear panel The motherboard sends commands to the other boards to control the functions of the instrument and to collect measurement and diagnostic information The motherboard outputs instrument status and measurement data to the graphics display and to the rear panel I O The motherboard also contains I O circuitry and the associated connector to monitor external digital status lines and to output analog voltages that represent the measurement data Connectors located on the motherboard include 8 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Measurement Interface Board Connectors Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Electronics External connectors e External Accessory to external converter e RS 232 485 Communications two connectors
102. aJg Jv SoBejoA Indu Bojeuy 6yuo9 O I 1e9 indu Bojeuy emsseld 9nd sGuipeou induj Bojeuy sBunjes uiuo 1e9 mo ouy ainssaid ejduies oju dniamog no eure 4 s6umas Buibbojejeg 1e9 dua n ewes snje1s dla sBuijes dung 1e9 peog 1nduj Ajuo 1H dwa dung euBis 10 99 0q 101284 asuodsay M0 4 pue aJnssaig 18S duo 1933 sainssaid Jona 129 oS xX99u2 ueds ojez 9polN PIPL du 10109190 sdula SensseJgd seo MOJSIHIB9 synejeq ieg 1 sn Josey soBuey wojsny Jos uonoejeg eurej4 ssed g due eusajul soBejoA dwa ueAQ 19S 42309 E9 4209 abuey 199185 ssed g LA jong UE pajsa eq suue v SUOISI9A wesboig apow Aejdsiq 19S punoJDyoeg 29 6yg eun Bay suun 2u09 Sjo1juo S10 32 eun SMS SULLY sonsoubeig uenis uoneiqieo donas Pay abuey nuey urew u 19 und uee10S 1591 Hes uaeJ0S dn 1amodg Figure 3 3 Flowchart of Menu Driven Firmware 3 5 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview Power Up Screen The Power Up screen is displayed when power is applied to the Model 517 This screen is displayed while the internal components are warming up and diagnostic checks are being performed Thermo IENTI ioris Run Screen The Run screen displays the current THC readings and statistics The status bar displays the time the password lock icon service wrench icon alarm bell icon and optional zero span sample solenoid valve status if installed Status Bar Icons The password lock icon indicates th
103. able 7 1 Model 51 Replacement Parts ssssssssssss 7 5 Table 7 2 Model 51i Calcuta 7 6 Table 7 3 External Device Connection Components sss 7 7 Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 30 Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections 7 31 Table 7 6 Part Number and Drawing Reference for Detector Assembly 7 49 Table 7 7 Acceptable Heater Resistance Readings 7 51 Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration 8 11 Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration ss 8 12 Table 9 1 Cable Options 9 2 Table 9 2 Color Codes for 25 Pin and 37 Pin Cables 9 3 Table 9 3 Mounting Options 3 0 cese is 9 3 Table B 1 Error Response Messages cccccccccccesesestetesesestetesesesteteseseetenenees B 3 Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands ssssssssss B 3 Table B 3 Averaging Times sse B 9 Table B 4 Alarm Trigger Values sss B 17 Table B 5 Record Output Formats ssssssssssssse B 23 Table B 6 Stream Time Values B 26 Model 51i Instruction Manual xvii Tables xviii Model 51 Instruction Manual Tabl B 7 Ranges oc t ttt tt ttc tue B 30 Table B 8 Fuel and Status Values B 33 Table B 9 Contrast Levels B
104. able digital input output capabilities Standard communications features include R 232 485 and Ethernet C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen streaming data and NTP Network Time Protocol protocols Simultaneous connections from different locations over Ethernet For details of the analyzer s principle of operation and product specifications see the following topics Operating Principle of the Flame Ionization Detector on page 1 2 Operating Principle of the Sampling and Flow Controls on page 1 3 Specifications on page 1 5 Model 51i Instruction Manual 1 1 Introduction Operating Principle of the Flame lonization Detector Operating Principle of the Flame lonization Detector Thermo Fisher Scientific is pleased to supply this total hydrocarbon analyzer We are committed to the manufacture of instruments exhibiting high standards of quality performance and workmanship Service personnel are available for assistance with any questions or problems that may arise in the use of this analyzer For more information on servicing see Chapter 7 Servicing The Model 51 uses a flame ionization detector or FID to measure organic gases and vapors Flame ionization is a well known technology that has been used in laboratories and industry for many years Flame ionization detectors are highly efficient they provide a wide linear range and sensitive detection of organic compounds An FID operates by ionizing organic compound
105. allocation for srecs B 24 me menu Simulates pressing menu pushbutton B 28 mode Reports sets operating mode as local or remote B 41 no of Irec Reports sets number of Irecs stored in memory B 24 no or srec Reports sets number of srecs stored in memory B 24 oven temp Reports sets the setpoint for the detector oven B 11 power up mode Reports sets the power up mode as local or remote B 42 pressure Reports current sample pressure B 10 program no Reports analyzer program number B 43 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 7 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Command Description Page pump Reports the status of the pump B 36 pump off always Sets the pump always off B 36 pump on always Sets the pump always on B 36 pump on when hot Turns the pump on when hot B 36 pump temp Reports temperature of the sample pump B 11 push Simulates pressing a key on the front panel B 28 range Reports sets current THC range B 30 relay stat Reports sets relay logic status for the designated relay s B 48 response factor Reports sets the response factor B 32 ri right Simulates pressing right pushbutton B 28 ru run Simulates pressing run pushbutton B 28 sample Sets zero span valves to sample mode B 31 sample control Reports sets current sample control pressure B 33 pressure sample pressure Reports current sample pressure B 10 save Stores parameters in FLA
106. ameters eene D 1 TCP Communication Parameters esee enne D 2 Instrument Jd SE dn cate uen Asie uni Lui bevel santas uo dtt evene D 2 Abbreviations Used aste veto dti toad derat n Dr usu iiu EE D 2 Basic Command tua a resti E ios D 2 Block Checksum Characters lt BC Cs iiec na a tol D 3 Geysitech Commands SCA EA D 3 Instrument Control Command ST eene D 3 Data Sampling Data Query Command DA D 4 Measurements reported in response to DA command D 6 Operating and Error Status esas D 6 Model 517 Instruction Manual xiii Contents xiv Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Figures Figure 1 1 Model 51 FID Schematic ssssssse 1 2 Figure 1 2 Model 517 Gas Flow System 1 4 Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material ssssssssssss 2 2 Figure 2 2 Model 51 Rear Panel ssssssssssssssssss 2 3 Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing ssssss 2 5 Figure 2 4 0 Terminal Board Views ssssssssssne 2 8 Figure 2 5 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector 2 9 Figure 2 6 D O Terminal Board Views sss 2 10 Figure 2 7 25 Pin Terminal Board Views 2 11 Figure 3 1 Front Panel Display sss 3 2 Figure 3 2 Front Panel Pushbuttons ssssssssssssese 3 2 Figure 3 3 Flowcha
107. and allows toggling of the state to either on 1 or off 0 The relays are restored to their original states upon exiting this screen e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Relay States Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 517 Instruction Manual 3 57 Operation Diagnostics Menu e Press to toggle and set the relay state to open or closed for the selected digital output Test Analog Outputs The Test Analog Outputs menu is used to set each of the analog output channels to zero or full scale Channel choices include all analog outputs 6 voltage channels and 6 current channels if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Test Analog Outputs ihe fiii i Set Analog Outputs The Set Analog Outputs screen contains three choices Set to full scale set to zero or reset to normal Full scale sets the analog outputs to the full scale voltage zero sets the analog outputs to 0 volts and reset returns the output to normal operation The analog outputs are returned to normal operation upon exiting this screen The following example shows the screen when all analog outputs are set to normal operating mode e In the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Test Analog Outputs gt ALL Voltage Channel 1 6 or Current Channel 1 6 DH HOM Piet 3 58 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Instrument Configuration Contact Information Alarms Menu Thermo F
108. and maximum values to value where value is a floating point representation of the concentration alarm limits Values must be in the units that are currently set for use The following example sets the THC concentration alarm maximum value to 5000 Send set alarm conc max 5000 Receive set alarm conc max 5000 ok alarm detector temp min alarm detector temp max These commands report the current detector temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the detector temperature alarm minimum value is 115 0 C Send alarm detector temp min Receive alarm detector temp min 115 0 deg C set alarm detector temp min value set alarm detector temp max value These commands set the detector temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms representing the detector temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the detector temperature alarm maximum value to 210 C Send set alarm detector temp max 210 Receive set alarm detector temp max 210 ok alarm filter temp min alarm filter temp max These commands report the current filter temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the filter temperature alarm minimum value is 115 0 C Send alarm filter temp min Receive alarm filter temp min 115 0 deg C
109. art in Figure 3 3 The Power Up screen shown at the top of the flowchart is displayed each time the instrument is turned on This screen is displayed while the instrument is warming up and performing self checks After the warm up period the Run screen is automatically displayed The Run screen is the normal operating screen This screen provides the current total hydrocarbon THC concentration along with some additional information concerning the instrument status From the Run screen the Main Menu can be displayed by pressing _M_ The Main Menu contains a list of submenus Each submenu contains related instrument settings 3 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Firmware Overview This chapter describes each submenu and screen in detail Refer to the ion for more informat appropriate sections jueuinjsu xoojun pJOMSSEg 9A0UI9H puomsseg obueyo jueuinujsu 4907 puomssed 19S piomsseg sneis dx3 O I sn e s e2epneju snieis aW 2u02 e901ny ueds Je2oiny 0197 19949 ueds 19949 OJ9Z 9SION 019Z 19949 JOHUB 184 10suas dwa Wey 19 89H SBUBIISAO JHL uibuens eubis ojuy 1262002 Byuog juauna suj sindino Bojeuy 1591 S9 e1s Aejoy uoz w w y3q epojy 13S synejeq 1esf 910 s9H eDeyoA serg sinduj jeubiq 1se1juo2 uea12S 1591 9x1d ejdsiq eunss
110. as flow rates used in both of the FID s operating modes ignite and run The fuel solenoid is a safety valve that is used to shut off the fuel supply whenever the FID flame is not lit The valve is a two way normally closed 24 volt DC solenoid The zero and span solenoid valves can be used to control the flow of zero air and span gas during calibration or calibration checks See Chapter 4 Calibration for a complete description of the zero and span plumbing and operation The firmware tasks are organized into four areas e Instrument Control e Monitoring Signals e Measurement Calculations e Output Communication Low level embedded processors are used to control the various functions on the boards such as analog and digital I O and heater control These processors are controlled over a serial interface with a single high level processor that also controls the front panel user interface The low level processors all run a common piece of firmware that is bundled with the high level firmware and loaded on power up if a different version is detected Each board has a specific address that is used to identify to the firmware what functions are supported on that board This address is also used for communication between the low level processors and the high level processor Every tenth of a second the frequency counters analog I O and digital I O are read and written to by the low level processors The counters are accumulated ove
111. ast data byte the status of outputs 15 11 is shown as the byte value 0x0A or binary 0000 1010 Output 15 is in the fifth bit position from the left and output 11 is the LSB of this byte The four remaining high order bits are zero filled Read Holding Input Registers reads the measurement data from the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These functions read the contents of one or more contiguous registers These registers are 16 bits each and are organized as shown below All of the values are reported as 32 bit IEEE standard 754 floating point format This uses 2 sequential registers least significant 16 bits first The request specifies the starting register address and the number of registers Registers are addressed starting at zero Therefore registers numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 The register data in the response message are packed as two bytes per register with the binary contents right justified within each byte For each register the first byte contains the high order bits and the second contains the low order bits Model 51i Instruction Manual C 5 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Request Function Code Starting Address Quantity of Registers Response Function Code Byte Count Register Value N Quantity of Registers Error Response Function Code Exception Code 1 Byte 2 Bytes 2 Bytes 1 Byte 1 Byte N x 2 Byte
112. asure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Input Config gt select Channel gt select Point gt Volts Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 49 Operation Instrument Controls Menu User Value Screen Contrast 3 50 Model 51 Instruction Manual The User Value screen allows the user to set the output value for the corresponding input voltage for the selected table point in the conversion table from 9999999 to 99999999 The default table is a two point table with point 1 0 00 V 000 0 U and point 2 10 00 V 10 0 U where U is the previously entered unit of measure e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Analog Input Config select Channel select Point User Value The Screen Contrast screen is used to change the contrast of the display Intensities between 0 and 10096 in increments of 5 are available Changing the screen contrast may be necessary if the instrument is operated at extreme temperatures Note The optimal contrast will change with changes in temperature A Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD to another If the LCD is replaced the contrast may need to be reset A Note If the display contrast is not optimal but the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 1
113. at no parameter changes can be made from B A lt Ihe alarm bell icon indicates that an alarm is active the front panel t The service wrench icon indicates that the instrument is in the service mode 3 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Status Bar Title Bar Reading i Operation Firmware Overview The first line labeled THC displays the current THC reading The line labeled AVG displays the average THC measurement during the current report period The lines labeled HI and LO respectively display the highest and lowest THC readings that have occurred during the current report period The report period is tied to the function of the analyzer s built in datalogger Adjustment of the logging period is discussed later in this chapter under Datalogging Settings If the report period is set to zero these lines indicate the average lowest and highest readings since the current run screen was displayed Pressing gt to reset the statistics also clears the AVG HI and LO readings and restarts the calculation The title bar indicates current flame status and operating mode The status bar displays the current time 24 hour format alarm service and password The word SAMPLE on the left of the status bar indicates the analyzer has the zero span valve option and is in SAMPLE mode Other modes appear in the same area of the dis
114. ata submenu displays a list of the analog output signal group choices to choose from Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config E Pido Streaming Data Interval The Streaming Data Interval screen is used to adjust how frequently a new record will be generated The following interval times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt Interval Note Add Labels Prepend Timestamp and Add Flags are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected A 3 34 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Choose Stream Data The Choose Stream Data screen displays a list of the types of data that can be sent via streaming data Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config Item 1 8 Concentrations The Concentrations screen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save t
115. atisfy the above formats or if the address does not match the Instrument Address the command is ignored This is a sample command to switch the instrument to zero mode instrument address 5 lt STX gt STO05 lt SP gt N lt CR gt Data Sampling Data This command initiates a data transfer from the instrument The instrument responds with measurement data which depends on the range Query Command p p g DA mode and is listed in Measurements reported in response to DA command below The command structure for a data query command is as follows lt STX gt DA lt address gt lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The lt address gt is optional which means it can be left out completely The lt address gt if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the lt address gt is left out then no space is allowed in the query string A command with no address is also a valid command The following are the different acceptable formats of the DA command with Instrument Address 5 lt STX gt DA lt CR gt lt STX gt DA005 lt CR gt lt STX gt DA lt SP gt lt SP gt 5 lt ETX gt lt BCC gt lt STX gt DA lt ETX gt lt BCC gt The data query string is valid and will be answered with data transmission only if the command starts with lt STX gt which is followed by the characters DA and the lt address gt if present matches the Instrument Address and the command is terminated with either lt
116. be assigned soft keys A Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 3 Operation Firmware Overview Alphanumeric Entry The alphanumeric entry screen is used to enter strings consisting of letters Screen numbers and other characters The cursor may be positioned within the entry line using the Ce Jand gt keys If a character is entered over an existing character that character will be overwritten Use the and keys to switch between the entry line and the keyboard as well as to move within the keyboard To select a character to add to the string use the cursor keys to position the cursor over the desired character and then press the key to add that character to the entry line On the right side of the keyboard are special functions BKSP is used to move the cursor in the entry line one place to the left deleting the character that was to the left of the cursor and moving any character at or to the right of the cursor one place to the left PAGE is used to change the keyboard character page For the English language this switches between upper and lower case alphabetic characters SAVE stores the string from the entry line into the parameter Alternately if the active cursor is moved to the entry line may be pressed to store the string from the entry line into the parameter Entry Line Keyboard E hid PLI Firmware The Model 51 utilizes the menu driven firmware as illustrated by the Ove rvi ew flowch
117. be turned off whenever the instrument is shut down for an extended period A The 517 requires either pure hydrogen or mixed helium hydrogen fuel 6096 4096 for operation In accordance with U S EPA recommendations on monitoring combustion sources the HT version of the instrument is optimized for operation with mixed fuel The unit can also be operated Model 51i Instruction Manual 2 3 Installation Connecting Support Gases Combustion Air Calibration Gases Sample Line Connection 2 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual with pure hydrogen but the flows will need to be re optimized and the performance may not meet published specifications The LT version of the instrument which is not intended for use in combustion source monitoring applications is optimized for pure hydrogen fuel and cannot be run with mixed fuel When purchasing fuel cylinders the gas purity or grade is a significant consideration For ambient or trace level measurements high purity fuel is required For many applications use of a hydrogen generator should be considered For source monitoring operations with the HT version of the instrument cylinders can be purchased from a specialty gas supplier and are usually marketed as FID fuel When the fuel gas is hydrogen the cylinder regulator should be set to 45 to 50 psig Consumption of the fuel is approximately 25 ml per minute When the fuel gas is a hydrogen helium mixture the cylinder regulator should be set
118. bserve the THC concentration reading at the top of the front panel display Notice an increase in the reported concentration level which directly corresponds Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuse Replacement I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Fuse Replacement to an increase in signal strength As the air pressure is increased the concentration readings will increase along a curve to reach a plateau where any additional increase in pressure will result in a negligible increase in concentration The air pressure pressure is optimized when this plateau is reached 5 Re calibrate the instrument prior to recording any permanent data Once the calibration is complete there should be no need to repeat this procedure All new pressure settings should be recorded for future reference With the setting of the air and fuel complete all of the instrument gas flows are considered optimized If any changes are made to the sample flow the fuel and air setting may need to be re optimized to maintain the correct fuel to sample ratio Use the following procedure to replace the fuse Equipment Required Replacement fuses refer to the Replacement Parts List in this chapter 1 Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord 2 Remove the fuse drawer located on the AC power connector 3 Ifeither fuse is blown replace both fuses 4 Insert fuse drawer and re connect power cord Use the fol
119. c Custom ranges 1 to 10000 ppmc Ambient operation temperature 15 35 C Storage temperature range 0 45 C Power requirements 100 VAC 50 60 Hz 115 VAC 50 60 Hz 220 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 420 Watts Physical dimensions 16 75 W X 8 62 H X 23 D Weight Approximately 50 Ibs Detector Type Flame lonization Minimum detectable limit 0 05 ppm carbon independent of gas Ignitor Processor controlled electronic glow plug Flame out safety Solenoid shuts off fuel on flame out Noise Less than 0 025 ppmc 10 second averaging Drift Less than 0 50 ppm in 24 hours Repeatability 2 of reading or 0 1 ppm whichever is larger Accuracy 2 of reading or 0 1 ppm whichever is larger concentrations from 10 to 15096 of span Range Auto ranging 0 to 10 000 ppm carbon Automatically adjusts front panel reading over the instrument s entire operating range Oven temperature User adjustable 100 to 125 C LT Model User adjustable 125 to 200 C HT Model Response time 90 of final reading within 15 seconds signal averaging set to 1 second Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 1 5 Introduction Specifications 1 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Sample Sampling rate 0 75 to 1 5 LPM nominal Detector flow rate Approximately 10 to 20 milliliters per minute Remote Operation Analog outputs 6 voltage
120. cale output the analog outputs should be adjusted Refer to the Analog Output Calibration procedure that follows Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 29 Servicing Analog Output Testing 8 Press to reset the analog outputs to normal FIR Analog Voltage Outputs ____ 2 gt il d Current Outputs A Analog Voltage Inputs Figure 7 14 Rear Panel Analog Input and Output Pins Table 7 4 Analog Output Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Voltage Pin Current Pin Channel Channel 1 14 1 15 2 33 2 17 3 15 3 19 4 34 4 21 5 17 5 23 6 36 6 25 Ground 16 18 19 35 37 Current Output Return 13 16 18 20 22 24 7 30 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Servicing Analog Output Calibration Table 7 5 Analog Input Channels and Rear Panel Pin Connections Input Channel Pin 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 9 8 10 Ground 4 8 11 14 Use the following procedure to calibrate the analog outputs if a meter reading in the Analog Output Testing procedure differed by more than one percent or after replacing the optional I O expansion board Equipment Required Multimeter 1 Connect a meter to the channel to be adjusted and set to voltage or current as appropriate Figure 7 14 shows the analog output pins and Table 7 4 identifies the associated channels From the
121. centration The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Averaging Time The Calibration Factors menu displays the calibration factors which are used to correct the THC concentration readings that the instrument generates using its own internal calibration data Normally the calibration factors are calculated automatically using the functions described in Calibration Menu later in this chapter However the calibration factors can also be set manually using the functions in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Factors The Background screen is used to perform a manual adjustment of the instrument s zero reading Before performing a manual zero adjustment allow the analyzer to sample zero air until stable readings are obtained The display shows the current THC reading The next line of the display shows the THC background correction that will be stored in memory The THC background correction is a value expressed in the current gas units that is subtracted from the detector signal to produce the THC reading of zero In the following example the analyzer displays 5 2 ppm of THC while sampling zero air A background correction of 0 0 ppm means that 0 ppm is being subtracted from the THC reading being displayed Therefore the Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Coefficient Operation Calibration Factors
122. ch on the front panel and check operation with a multimeter Thermo Fisher Scientific Malfunction Possible Cause DC power supply failure DC power distribution failure Display failure Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check the green LED on the back edge of the power supply If the LED is off the supply has failed Check 24 V output using a multimeter Check surface mount LEDs labeled 24V PWR on the motherboard interface board If lit power is OK If possible check instrument function through RS 232 or Ethernet Call Thermo Fisher Scientific Service Department Front panel display functions but pump heaters and or fan do not operate correctly Wrong voltage configuration Verify instrument configuration and power label and compare to local power Hame will not light Gas flows need adjustment Ignitor circuit failure Ignitor failure Oven not fully heated Sensor failure Check support gas pressures at the cylinder and instrument front panel against factory test sheet and adjust as necessary Check gas flow rates at FID exhaust and compare to suggested values Adjust fuel pressure up by 2 psi and or air pressure down by 2 psi Check ignitor voltage at test point 2 TP2 of measurement interface board during ignition cycle Should be approximately 2 3 V Plug in the installed spare ignitor or replace ignitor s if necessary Check the flame temperature whil
123. checksum is represented by two characters which represent a 2 digit hex number 1byte e g 1 byte OxAB hex checksum will be represented by the two characters A amp B The checksum is referred to as lt BCC gt throughout this document The following commands are supported by the Geysitech protocol e Instrument Control Command ST e Data Sampling Data Query Command DA There are three control commands supported by the Geysitech protocol This control command is a single letter which triggers an action in the instrument These commands are active only when service mode is inactive and the zero span option is present Command N switches the instrument gas mode to Zero mode Command K switches the instrument gas mode to Span mode Command M switches the instrument gas mode to Sample mode The following are the different acceptable formats of the ST command STX ST address control command ETX BCC OR STX ST address control command CR OR STX5ST address SP control command CR OR STX5ST address SP control command ETX BCC Model 51i Instruction Manual D 3 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands The address is optional which means it can be left out completely The address if present must match the Instrument Address Additional space can be present after the lt address gt If the received command does not s
124. cks Periods between 0 and 999 hours are acceptable To turn the zero span check off set the period to 0 e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration Zero Span Check Period HR EH mid The Total Duration Hour line is the sum of the zero span and purge duration minutes and is for viewing only The Zero Duration Minutes screen defines how long zero air is sampled by the instrument The Span and Purge Duration Minutes screens look and function the same way as the zero duration screen The span duration screen is used to set how long the span gas is sampled by the instrument The purge duration screen is used to set how long the purge period will be after doing a zero or span check This gives the instrument time to flush Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 17 Operation Calibration Menu Zero Span Averaging Time Zero Span Calibration 3 18 Model 51i Instruction Manual Reset out the zero and span gas before any meaningful data is taken Logged data is flagged as taken during a purge to show that the data is suspect Durations between 0 and 99 minutes are acceptable Each time a zero span check occurs the zero check is done first followed by the span check To perform just a zero check set the span duration to 0 off The same applies to perform just a span check e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span or Purge Duration Min Pe PULQPUPMPO The Zero Span Averaging Time scre
125. command sets the date of the analyzer s internal clock The following example sets the date to December 1 2006 Send set date 12 01 06 Receive set date 12 01 06 ok set default params This command sets all the parameters to their default values This does not affect the factory calibrated parameters Send set default params Receive set default params ok fuel type This command reports the current fuel type The following example shows that the current fuel type is hydrogen Send fuel type Receive fuel type hydrogen set fuel type value This command sets the fuel type to value where value is either hydrogen or mixed The following example sets the fuel type to mixed Send set fuel type mixed Receive set fuel type mixed ok Model 51i Instruction Manual B 35 C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration B 36 Model 51i Instruction Manual idle This command reports whether the instrument idle is on or off The following example shows that the instrument idle is on Send idle Receive idle on set idle onoff onoff on off This command sets the instrument idle to o7 or off The following example turns the instrument idle off Send set idle off Receive set idle off ok set ignite This command will set the instrument to attempt to light the FID flame The FID diagnostic screen is brought up when this command is issued Send set ignite Receive set ignite ok pump This command reports the status
126. cording to Table B 7 Send range Receive range 2 1 000E 02 ppb set range selection This command sets the THC full scale range according to Table B 7 The following example sets the THC full scale range to 20 000 ppb Send set range 5 Receive set range 5 ok Table B 7 Ranges Selection Range ppm ppb Range ug m3 mgm3 ppmc 0 1 01 100 5 1 000 1 10 000 5 20 000 50 000 gt o C2 C3 o Jolin Ioj A AJAJ Fh custom range range 1 2 3 This command reports the user defined value of custom range 1 2 or 3 The following example reports that custom range 1 is defined to 5 50 ppb Send custom 1 Receive custom 1 5 500E 00 ppb set custom range range value set custom 1 value set custom 2 value set custom 3 value Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration These commands are used to set the maximum concentration for any of the three custom ranges 1 2 or 3 to range value where value is a floating point number representing concentration in the currently selected units The following example sets the custom 1 range to 55 5 ppb Send set custom 1 range 55 5 Receive set custom 1 range 55 5 ok display mode This command reports the current display mode as either normal or statistics The following example reports that the display mode is statistics Send display mode Receive display mode statistics
127. cription 100480 00 Front Panel Pushbutton Board 101491 23 Processor Board 51i HT 101491 24 Processor Board 51i LT 100533 00 Motherboard 100539 00 Digital Output Board 100542 00 1 0 Expansion Board optional 102340 00 Front Panel Connector Board 102496 00 Front Panel LCD Display 103812 00 Transformer Step Down 220 240 VAC optional 101863 00 Transformer Step Up 100 VAC optional 103002 00 Measurement Interface Board 101167 00 Input Board Assembly 103762 00 Solenoid Valve 103933 00 Pump Assembly Low Temperature Version 112286 00 Pump Assembly Heated Head Version 108002 00 Pump Repair Kit New Technology Pump Low Temperature Version 108091 00 Pump Repair Kit New Technology Pump Heated Head Version 8606 Pump Repair Kit Low Temperature Version 18070 Pump Repair Kit Heated Head Version 101055 00 AC Receptacle Assembly 101681 00 Power Supply Assembly 24 VDC with Base Plate and Screws 103803 00 Fan Assembly 24 VDC 4070 Fan Filter 105198 00 Fuse 250 VAC 6 25 Amp SlowBlow for 100 and 110 VAC models 103894 00 Fuse 250 VAC 3 15 Amp SlowBlow for 220 240 VAC models 101688 00 Ambient Temperature Connector with Thermistor 12190 Filter Inlet Element 0 5 micron 12188 Aluminum Gasket Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 5 Servicing Cable List Cable List 7 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Part Number Description 105567 00 Ignitor Cable Assembly
128. d as the same shim rings must be used during re assembly A While unscrewing the diaphragm with one hand use your other hand to secure the support cap and shim ring s onto the diaphragm stud Lift the diaphragm support cup and shim ring s from the pump The compressor housing cover must be removed to gain access to and secure the support cup and shim ring s onto the stud Note that the quantity and thickness of shim ring s will vary from pump to pump Parts removed must be replaced exactly as found If repairing multiple pumps take care not to mix parts Place the parts removed in the previous step onto the threaded stud of the new diaphragm Carefully screw the new diaphragm into the connecting rod Secure the support cup and small parts onto the diaphragm stud using a technique similar to that used during removal It is helpful to hold the connecting rod at a slight angle until the threads are started Spin the diaphragm on until it is snug Lift and grip the edges of the diaphragm at 7 and 2 o clock and tighten firmly using both hands DO NOT use tools Note If the pump is loose and not mounted position and hold the pump with the motor shaft vertical when starting the threaded diaphragm stud into the connecting rod This helps to prevent the small parts from falling off the stud A 10 11 12 Turn the fan until the diaphragm is flat across mid point of the stroke With the diaphragm centered over the compressor housing f
129. d 2 characters exponent each with sign Mantissa sign and 4 digits The decimal point is assumed to be after the first digit and is not transmitted Exponent sign and 2 digits Example 5384000 0 is represented as 5384 06 0 04567 is represented as 4567 02 lt status gt is formed by lt operating status gt and lt error status gt and separated by a space i e operating status SP error status Each of the two operating status and error status are formed by two characters each representing a 2 digit hex number which is one byte 8 Bits operation status and one byte 8 Bits error status These two bytes contain the information about the main operating conditions of the instrument at that instant For details on how to interpret the status bytes refer to Table D 1 and Table D 2 below lt SFKT gt is the space provided for future use for special function It currently contains a string of ten 0 s i e 0000000000 Model 51i Instruction Manual D 5 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Measurements reported in response to DA command Operating and Error D 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Status Example Geysitech Protocol with transmission of three concentrations Instrument ID is 1 Operation Status is 03 Error Status is 04 Data Query String lt STX gt DA lt CR gt Reply String lt STX gt MDO3 lt SP gt 001 lt SP gt 2578 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP
130. ducts or vii use of the Products in combination with equipment or software not supplied by Seller If Seller determines that Products for which Buyer has requested warranty services are not covered by the warranty hereunder Buyer shall pay or reimburse Seller for all costs of investigating and responding to such request at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates If Seller provides repair services or replacement parts that are not covered by the warranty provided in this warranty Buyer shall pay Seller therefor at Seller s then prevailing time and materials rates ANY INSTALLATION MAINTENANCE REPAIR SERVICE RELOCATION OR ALTERATION TO OR OF OR OTHER TAMPERING WITH THE PRODUCTS PERFORMED BY ANY PERSON OR ENTITY OTHER THAN SELLER WITHOUT SELLER S PRIOR WRITTEN APPROVAL OR ANY USE OF REPLACEMENT PARTS NOT SUPPLIED BY SELLER SHALL IMMEDIATELY VOID AND CANCEL ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AFFECTED PRODUCTS THE OBLIGATIONS CREATED BY THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT TO REPAIR OR REPLACE A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT SHALL BE THE SOLE REMEDY OF BUYER IN THE EVENT OF A DEFECTIVE PRODUCT EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ORAL OR WRITTEN WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCTS INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE SELLER DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS ARE ERROR FREE OR WILL ACCOMPLISH ANY PART
131. e data treatment lrec min set data treatment lrec string set data treatment srec string string cur avg min max These commands set the data treatment to current average minimum or maximum for the concentration values recorded in the lrecs or srecs The following example sets the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send set data treatment lrec min Receive set data treatment lrec min ok list din list dout These commands report the current selection for the digital inputs or the digital outputs in the format Output no Index number variable name active state The active state for digital outputs is open or closed The active state for digital inputs is high or low Send list dout Receive list dout output index variable state 1 3 ZERO MODE open 2 4 SPAN MODE open 3 6 PURGE MODE open 4 8 GEN ALARM open 5 19 FUEL PRESS open list Irec list srec list stream list sp These commands report the list of current selections for lrec logging data srec logging data streaming data output or the scratch pad sp list Model 51i Instruction Manual B 19 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 20 Model 51 Instruction Manual The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original lis
132. e Filter Replacement Table 7 6 Part Number and Drawing Reference for Detector Assembly Item Description Drawing No Part No Oty 1 Screw 6 32 x 3 8 pan ph sems ss 102188 00 2 2 Retainer Thermocouple 78P518 14861 3 O ring 2 006 Red Silicone 11032 4 Ignitor Cable Assembly 105567 00 105567 00 2 5 Detector Cover 103689 00 103689 00 6 Wavy Washer 104165 00 104065 00 7 Flat Washer 104166 00 104166 00 8 O ring 2 018 Viton 16013 9 Upper Detector Insulator 104155 00 104155 00 10 Collector FID 104156 00 104156 00 11 Spacer 103770 00 103770 00 12 Jet Plate Assembly 103773 00 103773 00 13 O ring 2 003 Viton 14816 14 Base Insulator 104158 00 104158 00 15 O ring 2 014 Viton 6646 16 Upper Detector Base 104159 00 104159 00 17 Screw 6 32 x 1 4 ph flat head 103198 00 4 screw ss Internal Sample Use the following procedure to replace the internal filter element and Filter Replacement aluminum o ring Equipment Required Wrench 1 inch Long Philips head screwdriver Replacement filter element Replacement aluminum gasket Teflon pipe thread tape amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small must be worn while handling any internal component A Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 49 Servicing General Electrical Testing Gene
133. e Protocol Servers a 3 39 I O Configuration ecce te aee da 3 39 Output Relay Settings cocotte uet Mte eet 3 39 Logic SACS M 3 40 Instrument State cds able todas tus elut ated rani 3 40 A ai E S shein ado te du ete a ie Fc ETA 3 40 NoncAlarm ii ii 3 41 Digital Input Sos ala piece is 3 42 LOPES EA pt dii AAA ecran itis 3 42 Instrument ACM io 3 43 Analog Output Configuration Select Channel 3 43 Allow Over Under Range inici ici 3 44 Analog Output Configuration Select Action 3 44 Select Ratgeber dede gam Newstead eed 3 44 Minimum and Maximum Value 222 oS Warten eed 3 45 Choose Signal to UP etui aed 3 46 Analog Input ConDe ro o e eO d p oe 3 47 ESCOPETA 3 47 SAA EN 3 48 Decimal Places del aie seeded tee lsed 3 48 Number of Table Pol Escarola nios 3 49 Table Tots its a ts 3 49 MOLIS Suo ds ocn i a SL c tee 3 49 User Value e 3 50 Sereen Contrast ous mde sii dado 3 50 Service Mode 1 sco e d ecc acis tili nb cet petet dS 3 51 Date Time Pm 3 51 Elo e 3 52 Diagnostics Men 1o etait ii 3 52 Programi Versions ieena aaia n i c ban a 3 53 Voltages aicen ina daa 3 53 Motherboard Voltages ida 3 54 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual vii Contents Intetface Board Voltages sa aquatedistexie iih i aim beu ittis 3 54 WO Board Voltapes iii 3 54 APRA NST AUS dieere O ven ek taU veniae uo Reti 3 55 rr PU 3 55 Detector enables fo toe abf ee Cecelia a
134. e active state being high Send din 5 Receive din 5 9 AOUTS TO ZERO high set din channel index state This command assigns digital input channel 1 16 to activate the action indicated by index 1 35 when the input transitions to the designated state high or low Use the list var din command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding actions The following example sets the digital input channel 1 to 3 on a low to high transition Send set din 1 3 high Receive set din 1 3 high ok dout channel This command reports the index number output variable and the active state assigned to digital output channel The following example reports output 4 to be assigned an index number 11 corresponding to action of general alarm Send dout 4 Receive dout 4 11 GEN ALARM open set dout channel index state This command assigns digital output channel to be assigned to the action associated with index and assigns it an active state of state open or closed Use the list var dout command to obtain the list of supported index values and corresponding state The following example sets the digital output channel 4 to state 11 Send set dout 4 11 open Receive set dout 4 11 open ok dtoa channel This command reports the outputs of the 6 or 12 Digital to Analog converters according to l able B 16 The following example shows that the D A 1 is 97 7 full scale Send dtoa 1 Receive dtoa 1 97 7 Therm
135. e ambient internal temperature Calibration for the instrument Equipment Required Calibrated thermometer or 10 K 1 Resistor 7 34 Model 517 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Ambient Temperature Calibration WARNING The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service representatives A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Remove the instrument cover 2 Tape the thermometer to the thermistor which is plugged into the measurement interface board Figure 7 15 Note Since the thermistors are interchangeable to an accuracy of 0 2 C and have a value of 10 K ohms at 25 C an alternate procedure is to connect an accurately known 10 K resistor to the thermistor input AMB TEMP on the measurement interface board and enter the temperature reading A A 1 C change corresponds to a 5 change in resistance thus this alternative procedure can be quite accurate as a check however it clearly is not NIST traceable A 3 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Temperature Calibration The Calibrate Ambient Temp screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed
136. e been changed for the change to take effect A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings TCP IP Settings 3 36 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Use DHCP The Use DHCP screen is used to specify whether to use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP or not When DHCP is enabled the network dynamically provides an IP address for the instrument e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt Use DHCP pu db ELO REXPHNHEBR CT Re PLB ii PU RGR ES Fae Benes Bases Eri pri LH E Lira ITE PPP LES Ea Li IP Address The IP Address screen is used to edit the IP address The IP address can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABE IF DHCP IS ON For more information on DHCP see Use DHCP above e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt IP Addr PORTE Du UTER Py Prud mn Y vi Netmask The Netmask screen is used to edit the netmask The netmask is used to determine the subnet on which the instrument can directly communicate to other devices The netmask can only be changed when DHCP is off If DHCP is on the instrument will respond with NOT SETTABE IF Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 37 Operation Instrument Controls Menu D
137. e diaphragms on the four threaded rods Note Misalignment of the diaphragm can prevent proper start up and will severely reduce the service life of the replacement diaphragms A 11 12 Place the clean intermediate plate onto the compressor housing using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Recalling the position of the flappers noted during disassembly place the new flapper valves and O rings on top of the intermediate plate Place the clean head plate on top of the intermediate plate using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Install the four cap nuts and spring washers according to the spring washer assembly diagram in Figure 7 7 Tighten the cap nuts in a diagonal pattern to a torque of approximately 4 inch lbs taking care that the spring washers are fully engaged but not overly compressed Note Correctly tightened spring washers will maintain proper sealing pressure on the diaphragm across the operating temperature range of the pump A 13 14 15 16 Rotate the fan by hand to confirm that the pump turns freely Replace the compressor housing cover and gasket Install the 4 cover screws Do not over tighten Re install the pump assembly by reversing the removal sequence used earlier and verify that all fittings and electrical connections are secure Power up the instrument and if necessary go to the Pump Settings screen in the Instrument Controls menu a
138. e fuel min Receive alarm pressure fuel min 5 3 psi set alarm pressure fuel min value set alarm pressure fuel max value Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Alarms These commands set the fuel pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the fuel pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the fuel pressure alarm maximum value to 30 psi Send set alarm pressure fuel max 30 Receive set alarm pressure fuel max 30 ok alarm pressure sample min alarm pressure sample max These commands report the current sample pressure alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the sample pressure alarm minimum value is 5 psi Send alarm pressure sample min Receive alarm pressure sample min 5 0 psi set alarm pressure sample min value set alarm pressure sample max value These commands set the sample pressure alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the sample pressure alarm limits in pounds per square inch The following example sets the sample pressure alarm maximum value to 10 psi Send set alarm pressure sample max 10 Receive set alarm pressure sample max 10 ok alarm pump temp min alarm pump temp max These commands report the current pump temperature alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example repor
139. e is active the service wrench icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar To put the instrument into the service mode choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode in the Main Menu Advanced diagnostic functions are included in the service mode Meaningful data should not be collected when the instrument is in the service mode e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Manual Fuel Valve The Manual Fuel Valve Bypass screen allows the user to open the fuel valve Bypass manually overriding automatic operation Manual operation will terminate after five minutes for safety purposes Toggle Solenoid appears only if Bypass is ON Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Manual Fuel Valve Bypass 3 70 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Bypass Flame Detection Instrument Idle Mode Set Pressure and Flow Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu ERED Dh PATI LU iii USE CILE i5 d Re 4o POE Saek aet PHLPPPG The Bypass Flame Detection screen allows the user to bypass the flame detection routines overriding automatic operation When ON the analyzer will act as if the flame is lit in all respects whether it is or not and when turned OFF the analyzer will go to FLAME OUT condition and go through the ignition sequence unless the flame is still lit e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Bypass Fla
140. e orientation of the fittings before removing them from the solenoid valve 4 Remove and replace the old Teflon pipe thread tape from the fittings 5 To install the new solenoid valve follow the previous steps in reverse The FID flame is lit by applying a controlled voltage to an ignitor that screws into the side of the detector housing The ignitor contains a small coil of wire that produces a red hot ignition source when electric current flows through it Over time the ignitor can fail due to normal wear or due to exposure to corrosive atmospheres The Model 51 comes with a spare ingitor already installed which would just need to be plugged into the connector in place of the failed ignitor Equipment Required Replacement ignitor cable assembly Multimeter Philips screwdriver Wrench 5 16 inch Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 39 Servicing Testing and Replacing the Ignitor 7 40 Model 51 Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Use the following procedure to test the ignitor 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug connector 27 labeled IGN BIAS from the measurement interface board 3 Measure the resistance between instrument ground and pin 1 first tan wire An ignitor that is functioning properly sho
141. e output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data according to Table B 5 The following example sets the lrec output format to ASCII with text Send set lrec format 1 Receive set lrec format 1 ok Table B 5 Record Output Formats Format Output Format 0 ASCII no text 1 ASCII with text 2 Binary data lrec layout srec layout erec layout These commands report the layout string indicating the data formats for data that is sent out in response to the lrec srec erec and related commands For details on how to interpret the strings see Record Layout Definition later in this appendix Send lrec layout Receive lrec layout s s 1x f f f SF f f SE SF SE f f t DECGPPERPEEPEETE flags THC THC Avg THC Hgh THC Low Det Temp Filt Temp Flame Temp Int Temp Air PSI Sample PSI Fuel PSI lrec mem size srec mem size These commands report the number of lrecs and srecs that can be stored with the current settings and the number of blocks reserved for lrecs and srecs The following example shows that 1075 blocks were reserved for lrecs and the maximum number of lrecs that can be stored in memory is 241979 Memory allocation can be changed using the malloc command Send lrec mem size Receive lrec mem size 241979 recs 1075 blocks lrec per srec per These commands report the lrecs and srecs logging period The following example shows that the srec logging period is 5 minutes Send srec per Receive srec p
142. e the flame is out If flame temperature is below detector temperature by more than 10 degrees wait for full stabilization Check oven and flame temperatures reported under Diagnostics menu Check temperatures and FID signal reported on flame status screen Diagnostic menu Thermo Fisher Scientific Low or no signal from FID Flame out or low Signal cable is loose Check status screen for current flame temperature and signal Check air and fuel pressure Check sample pressure reading in Diagnostics menu Hold mirror or chrome tool against the FID exhaust port and check for steam which indicates flame is lit Check BNC connectors at both ends Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Malfunction Possible Cause Signal post short to ground Action Turn off power and disconnect signal cable Check for open circuit between center post and ground and also between center post and bias voltage supply If they are not open there may be a short Pump does not run Pump switched off in firmware Oven temperature too low Pump overheated Pump bearing failure Check pump settings under Instrument Controls menu The pump will not run until the detector oven temperature approaches the oven temperature set point 200 C for Model HT 125 C for Model LT nominal Remove the instrument cover Under the Instrument Controls menu shut the pump off Wait 30
143. e way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Filter Temp gt Min or Max Pump Temperature The Pump Temperature screen displays the current pump temperature and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 115 to 210 C If the pump temperature reading goes beyond 3 62 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Pump Temp Min and Max Pump The Minimum Pump Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the Temperature Limits minimum pump temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum pump temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Pump Temp Min or Max dud ii Sample Pressure The Sample Pressure screen displays the current sample pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 15 psi If the sample pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Sample Pressure EH DHOBM Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 63 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Sample Pressure Limit
144. ectrical Testing iris 7 50 Adjusting Critical Gas Pl ws 7 52 e 10 AAA Seed sce 7 52 Adjusting For Hydrogen Fuel aa 7 53 Adjusting For Mixed Fuel HH attain 7 54 Optimizing the Gas Plows aiia ecce ro re ec eet eade 7 56 Puse Replacement Da tedio sarral sitni 7 57 I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement 7 57 Digital Output Board Replacementic iuo edat rendu 7 59 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Motherboard Replacement 1 anita it lutto tie ds 7 60 Measurement Interface Board Replacement sss 7 61 Front Panel Board Replacements dale etti teet ec ue ips 7 62 LCD Module Replacement adria 7 63 Service LOCAS A as 7 64 System Description is 8 1 A EEE aoe 8 1 Flame Ionization Detector FID eee 8 4 Sample Etere ses a Cet Sa oe a ha MC ea 8 4 Internal Pundit o 8 4 Sample Pressure Regulator size a ice tice t esee taret 8 4 Electronic Pressure Controllets i uo iade et epos tbe tenes 8 4 Fuel Shutoff Solenoid i ise erbe bddied 8 5 Zero Span Solenoids este etu atten Se ce reae poda 8 5 MEIN WATE ud ian oc bete ise i Oe patet code ases Pe a deiade et ed 8 5 Instrument Controls cutem eleme ice tu KE 8 5 Monitoring Signals eese o ida 8 5 Output Communication us turiitate lauren tura dieses rien dida 8 6 Electro ES oo dest asiste dde 8 6 Motherboard ise uua toute ed ce cantata te ta Das Aa te 8 6 Measurement Interface
145. eeds to cool completely to ambient temperature prior to testing the temperature sensors A 5 Flame Thermocouple Disconnect the flame thermocouple from the measurement interface board J15 Connect the flame thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 51 Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Adjusting Critical Gas Flows A Preliminary Set Up 7 52 Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 Filter Base Thermocouple Disconnect the filter thermocouple from the measurement interface board J12 Connect the filter base thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C 7 Detector Base Thermocouple Disconnect the detector base thermocouple from the measurement interface board J13 Connect the detector base thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C 8 Pump PMP COL Thermocouple Disconnect the pump thermocouple from the measurement interface board J14 Connect the pump thermocouple to the electronic temperature gauge The measurement value should be equivalent to the current ambient temperature 5 C This section provides the necessary procedural steps to adjust all critical gas flows essential for proper instrument operation with e
146. ef explanation about the current screen or menu Help messages are displayed using lower case letters to easilv distinguish them from the operating screens Press to return to the Run screen or any other key to exit a help screen Ce 9 J up Down The four arrow pushbuttons t y C and e J 9 Left Right gt _ move the cursor up down left and right or change values and states in specific screens Enter The is used to select a menu item accept set save a change and or toggle on off functions The soft keys are multi functional keys that use part of the display to identify their function The function of the soft keys is to provide a shortcut to the most often used menus and screens They are located directly underneath the display and user defined labels in the lower part of the display indicate the function of each key at that time To change a soft key place the menu cursor gt on the item of the selected menu or screen you wish to set Press gt followed by the selected soft key within 1 second of pressing the right arrow key The edit soft key prompt will be displayed for configuration of the new label Note Not all menu items may be assigned to soft keys If a particular menu or screen item cannot be assigned the key assignment screen will not come up upon entering right arrow soft key combinations All items under the Service menu including the menu itself cannot
147. electricity The best way to clean the inside of the instrument is to first carefully vacuum all accessible areas and then blow away the remaining dust with low pressure compressed air Use a soft paint brush or cloth to remove stubborn dirt Fan Filter Inspection Use the following procedure to inspect and clean the fan filter Figure 5 1 and Cleaning 1 Remove the fan guard from the fan by unsnapping it No tools are required DO NOT remove the four mounting screws 2 Flush the filter with warm water and let dry a clean oil free air purge will help the drying process or gently blow the filter clean with compressed air 3 Re install the filter and fan guard amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 5 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal Sample Filter Cleaning A Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Internal Sample Filter Cleaning Mounting Screws 4 Fan Guard Filter Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters This section provides the requirements and instructions for cleaning the internal sample filter element in the Model 517 Use the following procedure to remove and clean the internal samp
148. embly option a source of span gas is connected to the SPAN port and a source of zero air is connected to the ZERO port Zero and span gas should be supplied at approximately 5 to 10 psi See Chapter 4 Calibration for details For more information refer to the Installation chapter the Calibration chapter and the Operation chapter The I O expansion board provides six analog current output channels 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA and eight analog voltage inputs 0 10 V The DB25 connector on the rear panel provides the interface for these inputs and outputs The 25 pin terminal board assembly is included with the optional I O expansion board Refer to Terminal Board PCB Assemblies in the Installation chapter for information on attaching the cable to the connector board For associated part numbers refer to the Servicing chapter The optional terminal block and cable kits provide a convenient way to connect devices to the instrument These kits break out the signals on the rear panel connector to individual numbered terminals Model 51i Instruction Manual 9 1 Optional Equipment Cables Cables 9 2 Model 51 Instruction Manual Two types of terminal block and cable kits are available One kit is for the DB37 connectors and can be used for either the analog output connector or the relay output connector The other kit is for the DB25 connector and can be used for the optional I O expansion board For
149. ement or decrement the D A counts until the FREQ value matches or is slightly above within 50 counts the value noted in the previous step 5 Press to store the value The screen flashes Calculating Please Wait and Done Values Saved messages Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 27 Servicing DC Power Supply Replacement DC Power Supply Use the following procedure to replace the DC power supply Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required DC power supply Philips screwdriver amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect all the power supply electrical connections Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 3 Loosen the captive screw securing the power supply to the chassis plate and shift the power supply slightly toward the rear panel then lift out the power supply Power Supply q Retaining Screws 4 BOTTOM VIEW Captive Screw Figure 7 13 Replacing the DC Power Supply 4 Remove the four screws holding the mounting bracket to the power supply Note orientation of the power supply on the mounting bracket to facilitate remounting 7 28 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Analog Output Testing Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing
150. en choose Sample Ignite Set the pressure equal to the setting entered in the Sample Run screen from the previous step Record the stored pressure value Return to the Set Pressure and Flow sceen choose Air Run Set the pressure to create an air flow of 230 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Ignite Set the pressure to create an air flow of 225 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 55 Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Optimizing the Gas 7 56 Model 517 Instruction Manual Flows 3 Re connect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the measurement interface board 4 Remove the flow meter from the FID exhaust port 5 Proceed to the following section Optimizing the Gas Flows Once all input pressures are at their respective set points use the followin put p P P 8 procedure to optimize the gas flows 1 From the Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt FID Status Press gt to initiate the ignition sequence The ignition sequence will make many attempts to light the FID before displaying FLAME OUT If at any time during the ignition sequence the display status bar reads FLAME LI
151. en allows the user to set the zero span averaging time The zero span averaging time is used by the analyzer only when performing an automatic zero or span check or adjustment The analyzer s averaging time is used for all other functions The following averaging times are available 1 2 5 10 20 30 60 90 120 180 240 and 300 seconds e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Avg Sec Zero and Span Calibration Reset are toggle items that change between yes or no when selected and are displayed only if Auto Calibration is set to YES in the Instrument Configuration screen in the Diagnostics menu If the zero calibration reset line is set to yes then not only is a zero check done but a zero adjustment is made If the span calibration reset line is set to yes then not only is a span check done but a span adjustment is made This is how to set up a scheduled recurring auto calibration Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Zero Span Ratio The Zero Span Ratio screen is used to set the ratio of zero checks to span checks For example if this value is set to 1 a span check will follow every zero check If this value is set to 3 there will be three zero checks between each span check This value may be set from 1 to 10 with 1 as default e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Zero Span Ratio ty PO pruni Ph dm EH DHOBM Prid YU LP V
152. enu Restore User Defaults The Restore User Defaults screen is used to reset the user calibration and configuration values to factory defaults e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Restore User Defaults Password Menu The Password menu allows the user to configure password protection If the instrument is locked none of the settings may be changed via the front panel user interface but they can still be changed via remote operation When the front panel is locked the user can still navigate the menu and view data instrument parameters and settings but nothing can be changed The password lock icon on the right side of the status bar indicates that the password lock is active The items visible under the Password menu are determined by the instrument s password status e Inthe Main Menu choose Password E DHOBM Set Password The Set Password screen is used to set the password that is used to unlock the front panel and is shown if the instrument is unlocked and the password is not set Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 79 Operation Password Menu Lock Instrument Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation Change Password 3 80 Model 51i Instruction Manual e Inthe Main Menu choose Password Set Password The Lock Instrument screen is used to lock the instrument s front panel so users cannot change any settings from the front panel The lock instrument
153. er 5 min Model 51i Instruction Manual B 23 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 24 Model 51i Instruction Manual set lrec per value set srec per value value 1 5 15 30 60 These commands set the lrecs and srecs logging period to value in minutes The following example sets the lrec logging period to 15 minutes Send set lrec per 15 Receive set lrec per 15 ok no of lrec no of srec These commands report the number of lrec and srecs stored memory The following example shows that 50 lrecs have been stored in the memory Send no of lrec Receive no of lrec 50 recs malloc lrec malloc srec These commands report the currently set memory allocation for lrecs and srecs in percent of total memory Send malloc lrec Receive malloc lrec 10 set malloc lrec value set malloc srec value value 0 to 100 These commands set the percent of memory space allocated for lrecs and sreco to value where value is a floating point number representing percent The following example sets the memory allocation for lrecs to 10 Note Issuing these commands will clear all the logged data in memory All the existing records should be retrieved using appropriate commands if required A Send set malloc lrec 10 Receive set malloc lrec 10 ok set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec set copy sp to stream These commands copy the current selections in scratch pad sp into the lrec srec or streaming data list Thermo F
154. er re assembly 4 Remove the expanded metal compressor housing cover to gain access to the inside of the compressor housing Remove the four screws and then remove the cover Re use any gasketing Remove any debris that may have accumulated in the bottom of the compressor housing 5 Remove the four cap nuts with spring washers and remove the head plate Remove the flapper valves and O rings from the intermediate plate Note the position of the flappers relative to the inlet and outlet valve ports on the head plate and intermediate plate 6 Remove the intermediate plate 7 Check that all parts are free from dirt and clean as necessary Take care to not scratch the parts 8 Unscrew the clamping disk using a spanner wrench Lift the clamping disc diaphragms connection rod disc and shim rings from the pump Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version Remember that the quantity and thickness of shim rings will vary from pump to pump If repairing multiple pumps take care not to mix parts Place the new diaphragms with the connection rod disc and shim rings on the clamping disc stud Position the assembly onto the four threaded rods mounted into the pump compressor housing Take care that the shim rings do not fall off the stud Carefully screw the clamping disc stud into the connecting rod extension Tighten the clamping disc taking care to maintain alignment of th
155. es The following c code will expand the incoming data void unpackDisplay void far tdib unsigned char far rlescreen int i j k unsigned char far sc4bpp sc2bpp screen ptr ptr screen unsigned char far malloc 19200 RLE decode the screen for i 0 i 19200 amp amp ptr screen lt 19200 i ptr rlescreen i if rlescreen i 0 unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptr 0 rlecount else if rlescreen i Oxff unsigned char rlecount unsigned char rlescreen i while rlecount ptrt Oxff rlecount To convert this data into a BMP for use with Windows it needs to be saved as a 4 bit per pixel gray scale image Also note that BMP files are upside down relative to this data i e the top display line is the last line in the BMP sc screen These commands are meant for backward compatibility with the C series Screen information is instead reported using the iscreen command above Send screen Receive screen This is an ISeries instrument Screen information not available Model 51i Instruction Manual B 29 C Link Protocol Commands Measurement Configuration Measurement Configuration B 30 Model 51i Instruction Manual range This command reports the current THC range The following example reports that the THC full scale range is set to 100 ppb ac
156. es current selections in scratch pad into Irec list B 24 copy sp to srec Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into srec list B 24 copy sp to stream Sets copies current selections in scratch pad into stream list B 24 copy srec to sp Sets copies current srec selection into the scratch pad B 25 copy stream to sp Sets copies current streaming data selection into the scratch B 25 pad custom Reports sets defined custom range concentration B 30 data treatment Irec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in lrecs B 19 data treatment srec Reports sets data treatment for concentration values in srecs B 19 date Reports sets current date B 35 default params Sets parameters to default values B 35 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 5 C Link Protocol Commands Commands B 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Command Description Page dhcp Reports sets state of use of Dynamic Host Configuration B 39 Protocol DHCP diag volt iob Reports diagnostic voltage levels for I O expansion board B 18 diag volt mb Reports diagnostic voltage levels for motherboard B 17 diag volt mib Reports diagnostic voltage levels for measurement interface B 18 board dig in Reports status of the digital inputs B 45 din Reports sets digital input channel and active state B 46 display mode Reports sets current display mode B 31 do down Simulates pressing down pushbutton B 28 dout Reports se
157. escribe the appearance of the full panel The full instrument panel as it appears on the screen has two columns of lines Each line is composed of three major components 1 a text field 2 a value field and 3 a button None of these three components is required The text field contains statically displayed text The value field displays values which are parsed out of the response to a erec command It also displays though background changes alarm status The button when pressed triggers input from either a dialog box or a selection list There are five kinds of buttons B I L T and N Each line in the layout string corresponds to one line on the display The layout string describes each of the three major fields as well as translation mechanisms and corresponding commands The first field in the layout string is the text It is delimited by a The string up to the first will be read and inserted in the text field of the line This is followed by a possible string enclosed in quotes that is used to place a string into the value field The value source which is the item or word number in the DATA EREC response appears next This is followed by an optional bitfield designator The datum identified by the value source can be printed as a string s hexadecimal x decimal d floating point f or binary b number Typically bitfield extractions are only done for decimal or hexadecimal numbers Thermo Fisher Scie
158. etween 1 and 50000 can be specified as a range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Set Custom Ranges The Custom Ranges screen is used to define the custom ranges The display shows the current custom range The next line of the display is used to set the range For more information about selecting ranges see Select Range above e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Set Custom Ranges Custom Range 1 2 or 3 The Averaging Time screen allows the user to change the averaging time which is the time period 1 to 300 seconds over which the THC measurements are averaged The THC measurement shown on the front panel display is updated every second However the value shown on the display is actually the average value measured over the course of the selected averaging time For example if the averaging time is set to 10 seconds the THC reading shown on the display at any given time is the average concentration over the last 10 seconds Increased averaging time reduces random variations or noise in the displayed values This improves the apparent signal to noise ratio and the instrument s minimum detectable concentration However increased averaging time also causes the instrument to have longer response times and Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 11 Operation Calibration Factors Menu Calibration Factors Menu Background 3 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual prevents the instrument from tracking rapid changes in hydrocarbon con
159. f there is conflict Before you assert 1 one coil in a group make sure the other coils in the group are de asserted 0 A Table C 3 Write Coils for 51 Coil Number Action Triggered 100 INVALID 101 ZERO MODE 102 SPAN MODE 103 SET BACKGROUND 104 SET IDLE MODE 105 CAL TO LO SPAN 106 AOUTS TO ZERO 107 AOUTS TO FS 107 AOUTS TO FS Model 51i Instruction Manual C 11 Serial Communication Thermo Fisher Scientific Parameters Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol This appendix provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet The Geysitech commands that are implemented are explained in detail in this document The Geysitech protocol support for the Series enables the user to perform the functions of reading the various concentrations and to trigger the instrument to be in sample zero span mode if valid for that instrument This is achieved by using the supported Geysitech commands listed below Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet For details of the Model 51 Geysitech Protocol specification see the following topics Serial Communication Parameters on page D 1 TCP Communication Parameters on page D 2 Instrument Address on page D 2 Abbreviations Used on page D 2 Basic Command Structure on page D 2 Block Checksum on page D 3 Geysitech Comma
160. fails to light after four full ignition cycles the unit will attempt re ignition once every 24 hours The Cannot Ignite alarm will be active during this time If you want to leave the instrument power on but you do not want the auto ignition sequence to trigger the unit should be set to Idle Mode as described in the Calibration chapter If necessary the warm up and stabilization periods can be bypassed by going into the menu system and manually lighting the flame from the FID Status screen However this should be avoided since full temperature stabilization is needed to achieve optimal performance Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 3 Operation This chapter describes the front panel display screens front panel pushbuttons and menu driven firmware For details see the following topics e Display on page 3 1 e Pushbuttons on page 3 2 e Firmware Overview on page 3 4 e Range Menu on page 3 8 e Averaging lime on page 3 11 e Calibration Factors Menu on page 3 12 e Calibration Menu on page 3 14 e Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 19 e Diagnostics Menu on page 3 52 e Alarms Menu on page 3 59 e Service Menu on page 3 70 e Password Menu on page 3 79 Display The 320 x 240 graphics liquid crystal display LCD shows the sample concentrations instrument parameters instrument controls help and error messages Some menus contain more items than can be displayed at one time For
161. fer to Table 8 2 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 2 RS 485 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 receive 8 receive 7 transmit 3 transmit 5 ground Ethernet Connection An RJ45 connector is used for the 10Mbs Ethernet connection supporting TCP IP communications via standard IPV4 addressing The IP address may be configured for static addressing or dynamic addressing set using a DHCP server Any serial port protocols may be accessed over Ethernet in addition to the serial port Up to three simultaneous connections are allowed per protocol External Accessory The external accessory connector is not used in the Model 51 analyzer Connector This port is used in other models to communicate with smart external devices that may be mounted hundreds of feet from the analyzer using an RS 485 electrical interface 8 12 Model 517 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Internal Zero Span Valves I O Expansion Board Assembly 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly Terminal Block and Thermo Fisher Scientific Cable Kits Chapter 9 Optional Equipment The Model 51 is available with the following options e Internal Zero Span Valves on page 9 1 e I O Expansion Board Assembly on page 9 1 e 25 Pin Terminal Board Assembly on page 9 1 e Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 1 e Cables on page 9 2 e Mounting Options on page 9 3 With the zero span ass
162. filter from the fan by unsnapping it 3 Ifthe fan is not being replaced install the new filter and snap it back into place and skip the remaining steps 4 Disconnect the fan power cable from the measurement interface board Do not lose the four nuts 5 Remove the four fan mounting screws and remove the fan 6 Install a new fan following the previous steps in reverse Mounting Screws 4 Fan Guard Filter Figure 7 11 Replacing the Fan Input Board Use the following procedure to replace the input board Figure 7 12 Re p lacement Equipment Required Input board Philips screwdriver Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 25 Servicing Input Board Replacement amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter to lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below 2 Disconnect the coaxial cable with BNC connector and the ribbon cable 3 Loosen the two screws holding the input box to the oven assembly and lift the input box off the screws Input Board Input Box Screws 2 Input Board Screws 4 Input Box Figure 7 12 Replacing the Input Board 4 Remove the four screws holding the input board to the input box
163. flon does not extend below the threads as excess tape may tear off and become lodged in the pump valves Turn the motor fan or counterweight by hand to be sure that the pump runs freely Re install the pump assembly by reversing the removal sequence used earlier and verify that all fittings and electrical connections are secure Power up the instrument and if necessary go to the Pump Settings screen in the Instrument Controls menu and turn the pump on From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Pump Settings Listen closely for a knocking sound that would indicate that the clamping disk is hitting the intermediate plate If you do hear a knocking sound equally loosen the four head nuts until the sound just disappears Allow the instrument to come up to full operating temperature then check for knocking as described in the previous step Verify that the pump is working correctly by checking the flow rate at the sample inlet bulkhead and the sample pressure reported in the Diagnostics menu The pump should draw at least 700 cc per minute of sample Thermo Fisher Scientific Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version aL yip m aa Head 11 amp dy ere D panan PS pad Si Cup Wash Wa ta m Ei Heat Resistant 16 A Heedplato E ER aN E or Bu LP non ANTE ST G Dente oue Position
164. formation on how to read registers and interpret the data refer to the 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers section in this appendix A Table C 2 Read Registers for 51 Register Number Variable 0 INVALID 1 amp 2 THC 3 amp 4 AVG THC 5 amp 6 HI THC 7 amp 8 LO THC 9 amp 10 DETECTOR TEMP 118 amp 12 FILTER TEMP 13 amp 14 PUMP TEMP 15 amp 16 FLAME TEMP 17 amp 18 INTERNAL TEMP 19 amp 20 AIR PRESSURE 21 amp 22 SAMPLE PRESSURE 23 amp 24 FUEL PRESSURE 25 amp 26 RAW SIGNAL 27 amp 28 ANALOG IN 1 29 amp 30 ANALOG IN 2 31 amp 32 ANALOG IN 3 33 amp 34 ANALOG IN 4 35 amp 36 ANALOG IN 5 37 amp 38 ANALOG IN 6 39 amp 40 ANALOG IN 7 41 amp 42 ANALOG IN 8 IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Writing 1 to the coil number shown in the following table will initiate the action triggered listed in the table This state must be held for Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported at least 1 second to ensure the instrument detects the change and triggers the appropriate action A Note The coils within each coil group in the following table are mutually exclusive and will not be triggered i
165. g Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen displays input channels 1 8 3 At the Analog Input Cal screen press Y to scroll to the channel selected in Step 1 and press 4 Press 4 to scroll to Calibrate Full Scale and press The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 5 Use Jand f to enter the source voltage and press _ to calibrate the input voltage for the selected channel connected to the source voltage 6 Press gt W to return to the input channels display and repeat Steps 3 5 to calibrate other input channels to the source voltage as necessary Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 33 Servicing Thermistor Replacement Thermistor Use the following procedure to replace the ambient temperature thermistor Replacement 5 7 Equipment Required Thermistor assembly Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Squeeze the thermistor latch and pull the thermistor assembly from the AMB TEMP connector on the measurement interface board 3 Snap the new thermistor assembly into the AMB TEMP connector Thermistor Figure 7 15 Replacing the Thermistor Ambient Tempe rature Use the following procedure to calibrate th
166. g The Erase Log screen is used to erase all saved data for the selected record type only not both srecs and lrecs e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Erase Log Qu cie Select Content The Select Content submenu displays a list of 32 record fields to use to configure the data to be logged When a field is selected a submenu list appears of the items to choose from to assign to those fields Item types are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed These record fields comprise a temporary list of items for the selected record type that must be committed via the Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 25 Operation Instrument Controls Menu datalogging menu before the changes will apply Note that committing any changes to this list will erase all currently logged data for the selected record type only as the format of the stored data is changed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content Choose Field Data The Choose Field Data submenu displays a list of the types of data that can be logged for the current field Choices are Concentrations Other Measurements and Analog Inputs if the I O expansion board is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt Field 1 32 Concentrations The Concentrations sc
167. ground signal the instrument must be zeroed using a gas that contains little or no hydrocarbon Typically the zero gas will be either air or nitrogen Because the oxygen present in air can affect the FID signal the zero gas should be selected to match the expected composition of the actual sample and therefore depends on the application For applications such as ambient monitoring that involve measurement of hydrocarbons in air the best zero gas is hydrocarbon free air For applications that involve monitoring combustion sources that contain less than about 1096 oxygen the best zero gas is hydrocarbon free nitrogen Thermo Fisher Scientific Span Gas Composition Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Selecting Calibration Gases In selecting a zero gas the operator should also consider the gas quality that is the level of hydrocarbon contamination that will be considered acceptable Ultra High Purity UHP zero gases with THC content of less than 10 ppb are available from specialty gas suppliers and would be most appropriate for ambient air monitoring or for other applications that involve measuring low ppm levels of hydrocarbons High quality zero air containing less than 10 ppb of total hydrocarbons can also be generated on site using a catalytic oxidation system Thermo Fisher Scientific s in house laboratories routinely use zero air generated by commercial zero air generators such as the Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 11
168. gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 SP 002 SP T T T Address First Concentration E format 25 78 Address 1 5681 00 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP gt 0000000000 lt SP gt 003 lt SP gt 1175 01 lt SP gt 03 lt SP gt 04 lt SP T T T Second Concentration 5 681 Address 2 Third Concentration 11 75 0000000000 lt SP gt lt CR gt The attached concentrations are in the selected gas units The measurements that are attached to the response if not valid in a particular mode will report a value of 0 0 The following 4 measurements reported in response to DA command for the Model 51 include e THC e Average THC e Low THC e High THC See Table D 1 for operating status and Table D 2 for error status for the Model 512 Thermo Fisher Scientific Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol Geysitech Commands Table D 1 Operating Status for Model 51 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO gt Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt Hex value 80 40 20 10 08 04 02 01 MSB LSB Operating status Service Mode On 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Maintenance Local 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Zero Gas On 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 Span Gas On 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 Pump On 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 Not Used 0 0 1 10 0 0 0 0 Not Used 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not Used 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Table D 2 Error Status for Model 517 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 DO
169. h impedance input with a multistage amplifier and a voltage to frequency converter that is used to digitize the signal The digitized signal is sent to the interface board through a ribbon cable which also carries power for the input board and the control signals that are used to set the amplifier gain The input board includes a test signal that can be activated under firmware control The test signal is injected at the first stage of the input board in parallel with the FID input This allows the input board and the connection to the processor system to be tested without using the FID The digital output board connects to the motherboard and provides relay contact outputs to a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument Ten relay contacts normally open with power off are provided which are electrically isolated from each other The I O expansion board connects to the motherboard and adds the capability to input external analog voltage signals and to output analog currents via a connector located on the rear panel of the instrument It contains local power supplies a DC DC isolator supply a sub processor and analog circuits Eight analog voltage inputs are provided with an input voltage range of 0 to 10 VDC Six current outputs are provided with a selectable operating range of either 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA The front panel connector board interfaces between the motherboard and the function key panel and graphics display It
170. he Outside Case on page 5 2 e Visual Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 2 e Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning on page 5 2 e Internal Sample Filter Cleaning on page 5 3 Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A f Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 5 1 Preventive Maintenance Cleaning the Outside Case Cleanin the Outside Clean the outside case using a damp cloth being careful not to damage the 8 P 8 8 C ase labels on the case T Equipment Damage Do not use solvents or other cleaning products to clean the outside case A Visual Inspection and The instrument should be inspected occasionally for obvious visible defects Cl ean in g such as loose connectors loose fittings cracked or clogged Teflon lines and excessive dust or dirt accumulation Dust and dirt can accumulate in the instrument and can cause overheating or component failure Dirt on the components prevents efficient heat dissipation and may provide conducting paths for
171. he calibration gases are introduced using the internal zero and span valves and plumbing the gas pressures must be properly adjusted to provide just enough flow to meet the demand generated by the pump but without over pressurization of the sampling system A suggested pressure adjustment procedure is outlined below Model 51i Instruction Manual 4 5 Calibration Connecting Calibration Gases 4 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Make sure that the pump is running then remove the sample line from the sample port Set the zero gas pressure regulator to 5 psi From the Run screen press gt Juntl the word zero appears at the left end of the status bar This opens the zero air solenoid With the solenoid open excess zero air flows out of the sample port Connect a small flow meter to the sample port and adjust the cylinder regulator pressure until an excess flow of 200 to 400 cc per minute is measured at the sample port Once the zero cylinder is adjusted set the span cylinder to the same pressure and switch to span mode by pressing _ gt until the word span appears on the status bar Be sure that there is an excess flow of 200 to 400 cc per minute Consumption of calibration gas is approximately 2 liters per calibration Figure 4 1 Internal Zero Span Valve Schematic Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Menus Manual Calibration Procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Calibration Menus The inst
172. he instrument as the user may program these outputs for either active closed or open A Request Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Starting Address 2 Bytes 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument Quantity of Outputs 2 Bytes 1 to maximum allowed by instrument Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Byte Count 1 Byte N Output Status N Byte N N or N 1 N Quantity of Outputs 8 if the remainder not equal to zero then N N 1 Error Response Function Code 1 Byte 0x01 or 0x02 Exception Code 1 Byte 01 IIlegal Function 02 lllegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read outputs 2 15 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Thermo Fisher Scientific Registers MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Request Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Starting Address Hi 0x00 Starting Address Lo 0x02 Quantity of Outputs Hi 0x00 Quantity of Outputs Lo 0x0D Response Field Name Hex Function 0x01 Byte Count 0x03 Output Status 2 10 OxCD Output Status 11 15 Ox0A The status of outputs 2 10 is shown as the byte value OxCD or binary 1100 1101 Output 10 is the MSB of this byte and output 2 is the LSB By convention bits within a byte are shown with the MSB to the left and the LSB to the right Thus the outputs in the first byte are 10 through 2 from left to right In the l
173. he selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings Streaming Data Config select Item Concentrations USE PLE Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item Pump temperature is only available in the HT Model e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Streaming Data Config select Item Other Measurements Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 35 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH pikari Piet Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected streaming data item The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Once an item is selected pressing will save the selected streaming data item e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Communication Settings gt Streaming Data Config gt select Item gt Analog Inputs EH Guided a Mi PILSPIPPO TCP IP Settings The TCP IP Settings menu is used for defining parameters that are required for Ethernet communications Note The instrument power must be cycled after any of these parameters hav
174. he status of the most recent zero span checks and set the maximum check offset The maximum check offset is in the same units that were used during calibration An alarm will be triggered if a zero or span check indicates Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 67 Operation Alarms Menu drift that exceeds the offset value The zero and span check screens are visible only if the zero span check option is enabled and function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Zero or Span Check Max Zero and Span The Max Zero and Span Check Offset screens are used to change the Check Offset maximum check offsets The maximum zero and span offset screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Zero or Span Check Max Offset Zero and Span Auto The Zero and Span Auto Calibration screens read only allow the user to Calibration view the status of the most recent automatic zero or span calibration The zero and span auto calibration screens are visible only if the auto calibration option is enabled and the zero or span cal reset function is enabled e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Zero or Span Autocal Ehhe fiii i 3 68 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Concentration Min and Max Concentration Thermo Fisher Scientific Limits Min Trigger Operation Alarms Menu The Concentration screen displays the current instrument reading THC concentration and sets the minimum and
175. her Scientific Servicing General Electrical Testing Hex wrench set Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Use the following procedure to test the heating system 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect J3 J4 and J5 located on the measurement interface board noting their location in order to facilitate re connection Measure the heater resistance using the multimeter Acceptable resistance readings are listed in the following schedule in Table 7 7 Table 7 7 Acceptable Heater Resistance Readings Description Resistance Reading Tolerance Pump Heater P C 280 ohm 10 ohm Detector Heater DET 140 ohm 10 ohm Filter Heater FLT 140 ohm 10 ohm 3 If there is a short circuit to ground in the heater circuits on the measurement interface board there will be continuity between any pin in any of the three connectors and ground Test with the multimeter between ground and each pin If the circuit shows anything other than open contact the service center for further instructions Use the following procedure to test the temperature sensors 4 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Prior to removing any connectors note their location in order to facilitate re connection Note The instrument n
176. her pogo assembly recheck the continuity measurement of these assemblies while they are removed and contact the service center A 2 Remove the four flat head screws securing the upper detector plate to the bottom of the detector Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 45 Servicing Detector Rebuilding 7 46 Model 51 Instruction Manual Carefully remove the internal parts of the detector and place them on the clean towels The upper detector insulator and o ring see diagram might be lightly adhered into the top of the detector use the pick or screwdriver to gently dislodge and remove them Remove the two screws holding the thermocouple retainer to the detector cover and place the retainer and screws aside The thermocouple o ring might also be adhered to the retainer so again use the pick or screwdriver to remove it Using the pick carefully remove the two o rings from the lower detector base mounted to the oven heater plate Note Be careful not to get any rubber crumbs caught in the two small holes in the base one is in the center of the central depression one is on the concentric ring If rubber crumbs do get into these holes gas flows to the FID will be blocked A 6 If necessary blow clean compressed air through each of the two gas feed lines to remove o ring debris from the base plate holes Once the o rings have been removed the parts should be cleaned before reassembly Use these steps to clean the parts a
177. hot A Power Connection The only electrical connection needed for start up of the Model 51 is the power cord which plugs into a recepticle on the rear panel Figure 2 2 Before the power cord is connected be sure that the front panel power switch is off WARNING The Model 51i is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated A For detailed information about connecting to the instrument refer to Connecting External Devices on page 2 7 Instrument Controls Menu on page 3 19 I O Configuration on page 3 39 Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 Terminal Block and Cable Kits on page 9 1 For detailed information about troubleshooting a connection refer to Analog Output Testing on page 7 29 2 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting External Devices Connecting Several components are available for connecting external devices to iSeries External Devices instruments These connection options include e Individual terminal board PCB assemblies standard e Terminal block and cable kits optional e Individual cables optional For detailed information on the optional connection components refer to the Optional Equipment chapter For associated part numbers refer to External Device Connection Components on page 7 7 Terminal Board PCB The terminal board PCB assemblies are circuit boards with a D
178. ication Settings gt TCP IP Settings gt NTP Svr aa pe Pria The I O Configuration menu deals with configuration of the analyzer s I O system The analog input configuration is displayed only if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration EDEIZE Pria The Output Relay Settings menu displays a list of the 10 digital output relays available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital outputs may take up to one second after the assigned state occurs to show up on the outputs A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Output Relay Settings Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 39 Operation Instrument Controls Menu 3 40 Logic State Instrument State Alarms Model 51 Instruction Manual DH pikari ML MA The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital output pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital output action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed The Instrument State submenu allows the user to select the instrument state that is assigned to the selected relay output A submenu lists signal types of either alarms or
179. ice e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Analog Output Config gt select Channel gt Choose Signal to Output PEPR P Dii Py PTET DH uid YU i 2o a d wm LC B 2o a E S EA Table 3 4 Signal Type Group Choices Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs None None None THC Detector Temp Analog Input 1 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed AVG THC Filter Temp Analog Input 2 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed HI THC Pump Temp Analog Input 3 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Concentrations Other Measurements Analog Inputs LO THC Flame Temp Analog Input 4 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Internal Temp Analog Input 5 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Air Pressure Analog Input 6 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Sample Pressure Analog Input 7 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Fuel Pressure Analog Input 8 if 1 0 Exapnsion board installed Raw Signal Analog Input Configuration The Analog Input Configuration menu displays a list of the 8 analog input channels available for configuration This screen is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed Configuration includes entering the Descriptor Units Decimal Places choice of 1 10 points in the table and corresponding number of points selected e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls
180. ignal strength calculated during a calibration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Signal Strength ip ouod Piet The Minimum Signal Strength alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum signal strength alarm limit The minimum and maximum signal strength screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Signal Strength gt Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Noise Min and Max Zero Noise Limits Zero and Span Check Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu EH hid The Zero Noise screen displays the zero noise measured during the most recent calibration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 001 to 100 000 If calibration produces a zero noise reading that goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Zero Noise The Minimum Zero Noise alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum zero noise alarm limit The minimum and maximum zero noise screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Zero Noise Min or Max EH DHOBM The Zero and Span Check screens allow the user to view t
181. ignal strength is almost directly dependent on the number of carbon atoms in the molecule For example if the instrument is calibrated with propane C3Hs and then used to measure hexane C amp Hi4 the ppm readings will be approximately double the true concentration For substituted hydrocarbons which contain elements other than carbon and hydrogen the signal strength will usually be somewhat reduced For example methanol CH3OH produces as signal that is about 30 weaker than that produced by methane CH Thermo Fisher Scientific Connecting Calibration Gases Thermo Fisher Scientific Calibration Connecting Calibration Gases For applications involving measurement of a well defined sample stream the instrument reading can be adjusted to provide a true concentration reading through the use of a response factor A response factor is simply a multiplier that adjusts the instrument reading according to an experimentally determined relationship between the calibration gas and the compound being sampled If a response factor is used it should be entered under Response Factor in the Instrument Controls menu and it will automatically be applied to the instrument reading For example if a response factor of three is entered all hydrocarbon readings are multiplied by three before they are displayed In some industries that use FIDs the issue of varying signal strength is addressed by expressing concentrations in parts per mill
182. ing H Teo Diaphragm Ly M Connecting Rod Disk EL Shim Diskis E ER CO el AC Motor Grounding Ml Screw LAY a Rod Court F 9 7 E I HA N e C TT Heed Plate N A KA DE gt B Bo sure valve and valve pleto ara positioned as shown above Larga hole opposite ernall hole Figure 7 8 Rebuilding the Pump Heated Head Version For the new technology pump repair kit part number 108002 00 use the following procedure to rebuild the pump Figure 7 9 provided by KNF The new technology pump will have the repair kit part number on its label If no repair kit part number is listed refer to the procedure for the older model pump following this procedure Equipment Required Pump repair kit low temp version Marking pencil or Sharpie marker Nut driver 7 mm Needle nose pliers Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 19 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version 7 20 Model 51 Instruction Manual A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Mark a sketch of the position of any tubes and fittings for ease of re assembly later 2 Remove the pump assembly from the analyzer as described in Pump Replacement 3 Mark the posit
183. ings e dpa edi i quideni des 3 22 Rod Lea ite teat cl bee ormai cse OM obe be a MM A Le dE 3 23 View Logged Daten qa ricette IE 3 24 Number of Records iii 3 24 Date and Limestone ena cedere utro R a iu esent end 3 24 Erase Lori A petu bed ib diens 3 25 Select Contento e a aan eat es Tora Mads 3 25 Ch ose Field A aea ni esed aded edu 3 26 CONCEDA ION Sri sii it ii 3 26 Other Measurements usitas aos 3 27 Analog Inputs itr ntu ti 3 27 Commit Content dada Ltd ia 3 28 Reset to Default Content osea teu tete Ie eS 3 28 Configure Datalogging s eoo oua diia ite eto e Danh us 3 29 Logging Period Vn O bie e 3 29 Memory Allocation Percent eese tera nhe eR d RU RE 3 29 D ta prion M US 3 30 Communication SECM GS indie 3 30 Seral Settings cues os aM ogo EM IPAE M ELS I DE 3 31 Paud Ratei das nt dee est ee sees aa ahena uem dinde i Lacie 3 31 Data Bits S 3 31 ln ATE AEA td 3 32 Stop BUS A AAA A serine 3 32 I5 232 R5 495 S EC 3 32 Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents astuto iia 3 33 Communication Protocol msi ita 3 33 Streaming Data Configuration cosida 3 34 Streaming Data Interval iii 3 34 Choose Stream Dita iota oae tte lt um d ied 3 35 CONTEMPLA edo sir ip oe ee Ere asa Celo ipei iie Enc 3 35 Other M castrense eet ua an cuui 3 35 Analog Input 3 36 TCP IP Setter iii 3 36 Use DHCP asma 3 37 IP Address onec O 3 37 IN ebirias Keane anene teu a de 3 37 Detalla eei 3 38 Host IN ANG AAA ve oia np et cae 3 38 Network Tim
184. input channels to zero volts 1 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analog Input Cal The Analog Input Cal screen appears Note If Service Mode is not displayed refer to Accessing the Service Mode on page 7 4 then return to the beginning of this step A 2 At the Analog Input Cal screen press to scroll to a channel and press 3 With the cursor at Calibrate Zero press e The screen displays the input voltage for the selected channel 4 Make sure that nothing is connected to the channel input pins and press to calibrate the input voltage on the selected channel to zero volts The screen displays 0 00 V as the voltage setting Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Analog Input Calibration 5 Press Cu gt Cm to return to the Analog Input Cal screen and repeat Steps 2 through 4 to calibrate other input channels to zero as necessary 6 Continue with the Calibrating the Input Channels to Full Scale procedure that follows Calibrating the Input Use the following procedure to calibrate the input channels to full scale by Channels to Full Scale applying a known voltage to the channels Equipment Required DC voltage source greater than 0 volts and less than 10 volts 1 Connect the known DC voltage source to the input channel 1 8 to be calibrated Figure 7 14 shows the analog input pins and Table 7 5 identifies the associated channels 2 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Analo
185. into the system A The first step in calibration is to determine the magnitude of the signal that the detector outputs when there are no organic compounds present in the sample stream This signal which is referred to as the background or zero signal originates from organic contaminants in the support gases or instrument gas handling systems from leakage currents in the detector from thermionic emissions at the jet from electrical noise in the amplifiers and from other random sources Once the background signal has been measured it is saved in the instrument memory as the zero offset During routine measurement the zero offset is subtracted from the detector signal leaving only that portion of the signal that can be attributed to organic compounds in the sample After the zero offset has been established span gas containing a known concentration of propane or methane is introduced The instrument calculates an estimated concentration by subtracting the zero offset from the span signal and multiplying that difference by a fixed constant that is hard coded into the analyzer s embedded program This constant is established experimentally at the factory and is an expression of detector sensitivity for a typical instrument of this design To complete the Model 51i Instruction Manual 4 7 Calibration Manual Calibration Procedure Background Zero 4 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Adjust calibration a span coefficient or correc
186. ion Board Optional Replacement procedure in this chapter 3 Remove the digital output board See the Digital Output Board Replacement procedure in this chapter 4 Unplug all connectors from the motherboard Note connector locations to facilitate re connection 5 Using the nut driver remove the eight standoffs securing the board to the rear panel Figure 7 21 6 Pop the motherboard off of the support bracket and remove the motherboard 7 To install the motherboard follow the previous steps in reverse 8 Calibrate the analog voltage outputs as defined earlier in this chapter all ranges Thermo Fisher Scientific Measurement Interface Board Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Measurement Interface Board Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the measurement interface board Figure 7 22 Equipment Required Measurement interface board Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Lower the partition panel then proceed to the next step below Refer to Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel in this chapter 2 Unplug all connectors from the measurement interface board Note the locations of the connectors to facilitate re connection 3 Unscrew the two screws at the to
187. ion carbon ppmc rather than in ppm The concentration in ppmc is defined as the concentration in ppm multiplied by the number of carbon atoms per molecule Since FID response nearly follows carbon number expressing concentrations in terms of ppmc automatically adjusts the instrument reading for differences in response To follow the example cited above 100 ppm of propane would equal 300 ppmc while 100 ppm of hexane which produces double the FID response would be equal to 600 ppmc Note In the case of methane the concentration in terms of ppmc is equal to the concentration in ppm Therefore in some industries it has become standard practice to calibrate with methane and then report the concentrations as methane equivalents A For source monitoring applications the calibration gases should be introduced to the sample inlet at the probe For ambient monitoring applications the calibration gases can be introduced through the sample inlet or if the instrument is equipped with internal zero and span valves the gases can be connected directly to the zero and span ports on the rear panel Whichever configuration is selected the calibration gases must enter the sampling system at a controlled flow rate to avoid over pressurization For example if span gas is introduced directly into the sample inlet from a pressurized cylinder an atmospheric pressure dump or bypass must also be included to prevent pressurizing the sample inlet If t
188. ion in Chapter 3 Send set tz EST 5EDT Receive set tz EST 5EDT ok analog iout range channel This command reports the analog current output range setting for channel where channel must be between 1 and 6 inclusive The following example reports current output channel 4 is in the 4 20 mA range according to Table B 14 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send analog iout range 4 Receive analog iout range 4 2 set analog iout range channel range This command sets analog current output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 14 The following example sets current output channel 4 to the 0 20 mA range This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O expansion board is not detected Send set analog iout range 4 1 Receive set analog iout range 4 1 ok Table B 14 Analog Current Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 20 mA 2 4 20 mA 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration analog vin channel This command retrieves the analog voltage input channel data both the calculated value and the actual voltage In the following example the calculated value of channel 1 is 75 325 degrees F volts are 2 796 This command responds with feature not enabled if the I O e
189. ion of the pump top plate bottom plate and compressor housing relative to each other by drawing a line on the edges with a pencil or marker to ensure proper re assembly 4 The aluminum compressor housing cover must be removed to gain access to the inside of the compressor housing Remove the four screws and then remove the cover Re use any gasketing Remove any debris that may have accumulated in the bottom of the compressor housing 5 Remove the four top plate screws and remove the top plate Note the positioning of the flapper valve relative to the valve ports on the top plate and bottom plate Lift off the flapper valve 6 Remove the bottom plate 7 Check that all parts are free from dirt and clean as necessary DO NOT scratch the parts 8 Rotate the fan so that the diaphragm is positioned at the top dead center This will help unseat the edge of the diaphragm If required push up from underneath the diaphragm or use a non metallic tool to pry up the diaphragm from the housing groove Do not scratch the head components Unscrew the old diaphragm by turning it counterclockwise using both hands Lift up and grip the edges of the diaphragm at 10 and 4 o clock High intial force may be required to break the diaphragm loose DO NOT use tools Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version Note Take care not to lose the shim rings positioned between the diaphragm and connecting ro
190. ions formed during the oxidation of carbon hydrogen bonds the strength of the response is directly related to the molar concentration of the organic compound and the number of carbon atoms per molecule The current signal generated at the FID s collector electrode is carried through a shielded cable that runs to an electrometer and amplifier circuit that is located inside the instrument on the front of the detector oven The electrometer circuit converts the current to a voltage that is amplified and then digitized by a voltage to frequency V F converter The frequency output can range from a few hundred Hz up to a maximum of approximately 400 000 Hz The instrument s amplifier design includes three ranges or gain settings that function under processor control and are switched on the basis of the V F output This allows the instrument to measure total hydrocarbon THC concentrations ranging from less than 0 1 ppmc to over 40 000 ppmc without input from the operator Real time hydrocarbon concentrations are calculated from the digitized signal by applying a calibration factor This factor is automatically calculated during calibration by comparing the FID signal produced while sampling high purity zero air to that produced by a span gas containing a known quantity of hydrocarbon Once the hydrocarbon concentration has been determined it is displayed on the front panel and made available over the analog outputs and the serial or Ethernet connecti
191. irmly seat the diaphragm edge into the compressor housing groove Place the clean bottom plate onto the compressor housing using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Then place the new flapper valve on top of the intermediate plate Place the clean top plate on top of the bottom plate using the reference mark made earlier to ensure the correct orientation Tighten the four top plate screws snugly in a diagonal pattern and then tighten to a maximum torque of 6 7 inch lbs Turn the fan by hand to confirm that the pump turns freely Model 51 Instruction Manual 7 21 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Low Temp Version 13 Replace the compressor housing cover and gasket Install the four cover screws Do not over tighten 14 Re install the pump assembly by reversing the removal sequence used earlier and verify that all fittings and electrical connections are secure 15 Power up the instrument and turn the pump on Allow the instrument to come up to full operating temperature Verify that the pump is working correctly by checking the flow rate at the sample inlet bulkhead the pump should draw at least 700 cc per minute of sample and checking to see that the sample pressure reported in the Diagnostic menu is close to the set pressure Top plate screws 4x Spring wosher 4x Wosher 4x Headplate Valveplote Intermediate plate Diaphragm Support cup Shim rings 2x Figure 7 9 Rebuilding the Pump
192. isher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Instrument Configuration screen displays information on the hardware configuration of the instrument Note If the analyzer is in service mode pressing will toggle the selected item between yes and no Zero span valves needs to be set to ON in order to do zero and span checks and auto calibration needs to be set to ON in order to do zero and span calibration resets A e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Instrument Configuration USE E neek Enone PDT Sei R GLE EH DHOB The Contact Information screen displays the customer service information e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Contact Information The Alarms menu displays a list of items that are monitored by the analyzer If the item being monitored goes outside the lower or upper limit the status of that item will go from OK to either LOW or HIGH respectively If the alarm is not a level alarm the status will go from OK to FAIL The total number of alarms detected is displayed at the top of the menu to indicate how many alarms have occurred To see the actual reading of an item and its minimum and maximum limits move the cursor to the item and press 4 Items displayed are determined by the options installed The Pump Temperature is present only in the HT Model The Zero Span Check and Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 59 Operation Alarms Menu Auto Calibration alarms are vi
193. isher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list in scratch pad into the lrecs list Send set copy sp to lrec Receive set copy sp to lrec ok set copy lrec to sp set copy srec to sp set copy stream to sp These commands copy the current contents of the lrec srec or streaming data list into the scratch pad sp These commands are useful in easy modification of current lrec srec or streaming data lists The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list For more information on how to edit the scratch pad see the sp field command The following example copies the current list of lrecs into the scratch pad Send set copy lrec to sp Receive set copy lrec to sp ok sp field number This command reports the variable number and name stored at the index in the scratch
194. it ppm ppb pg m mg m ppmc These commands set the gas units to ppm ppb 1g m mg m 96 or ppmc The following example sets the gas units to mg m Send set gas unit mg m3 Receive set gas unit mg m3 ok response factor This command reports the current response factor that is the multiplier set for the THC measurement before the concentration is displayed The following example shows the response factor is 1 000 Send response factor Receive response factor 1 000 set response factor value This command sets the response factor to value where value is a floating point number representing the response factor The following example sets the response factor to 5 Send set response factor 5 Receive set response factor 5 ok air control pressure This command reports the current air control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example shows that for hydrogen fuel during ignition the air control pressure is set to 17 psi Send air control pressure O 1 Receive air control pressure O 1 17 000 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Hardware Configuration set air control pressure fuel status value This command sets the air control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example sets the air control pressure for mixed fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number representing the air control pressure in PSI The follo
195. ither hydrogen fuel H5 or mixed fuel H2 He supplies Equipment Required 0 500 cc min Flow meter accurate to 2 0 WARNING Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Perform the following preliminary set up procedure before adjusting for hydrogen fuel H2 or adjusting for mixed fuel H2 He fuel 1 Before proceeding ensure that the instrument is in FLAME OUT and the oven temperatures are at the prescribed set points and fully equilibrated 2 Remove the instrument cover and disconnect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the measurement interface board Thermo Fisher Scientific Adjusting For Hydrogen Fuel Set the Fuel Pressure Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Connect a source of clean dry air to the instrument s air bulkhead on the rear panel and set the supply pressure to 60 psi Connect a flow meter to the FID exhaust located on the rear panel Make sure the instrument is in Service Mode Refer to Accessing the Service Mode in this chapter if necessary Use the following procedure to adjust the gas flows for hydrogen fuel This includes e Set the Fuel Pressure e Set the Sample Pressure e Set the Combustion Air Pressure 1 Connect hydrogen and air to the instrument s fuel bulkhead fitting and air bulkhead fitting respectively on
196. l PHLPUPPG Instrument Controls The Instrument Controls menu contains a number of items that may be Menu selected to control various instrument operational parameters The firmware controls listed in this menu enable control of the listed instrument functions e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls rM mt Set Display Mode The Set Display Mode screen is used to set the run screen display mode to either Statistics or Normal Statistics mode displays the current THC reading as well as the average high and low concentration readings Normal mode displays only the current THC reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Display Mode Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 19 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH HOM 2o a d Set Oven Temperature The Set Oven Temperature screen is used to adjust the detector oven Gas Pressures A 3 20 Model 51 Instruction Manual temperature setting Temperature ranges are 100 125 C for the LT Model and 125 200 C for the HT Model e In the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Set Oven Temperature The Gas Pressures menu is used to view and adjust the set pressures for the sample air hydrogen and mixed fuel Note that pressures for both hydrogen and mixed fuel can be entered See the next section on how to select which fuel is to be used Two pressures are specified for each gas One is used during flame ignitio
197. lags 8530000 THC 0 182 THC Avg 0 126 THC High 1 119 THC Low 2 889 Det Temp 124 847 Filt Temp 124 957 Flame Temp 200 077 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 14 441 Sample PSI 2 059 Fuel PSI 25 326 09 00 01 03 07 flags 8530000 THC 0 225 THC Avg 0 127 THC High 1 119 THC Low 2 889 Det Temp 125 250 Filt Temp 125 031 Flame Temp 200 077 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 14 441 Sample PSI 2 059 Fuel PSI 25 326 09 15 01 03 07 flags 8530000 THC 3 185 THC Avg 0 139 THC High 3 257 THC Low 2 889 Det Temp 125 165 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 21 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging B 22 Model 51i Instruction Manual Filt Temp 125 128 Flame Temp 199 978 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 14 427 Sample PSI 2 059 Fuel PSI 25 312 09 30 01 03 07 flags 8530000 THC 3 279 THC Avg 0 179 THC High 3 647 THC Low 2 889 Det Temp 125 275 Filt Temp 125 128 Flame Temp 199 978 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 14 427 Sample PSI 2 059 Fuel PSI 25 3 Figure B 1 Flags Field lrec format srec format erec format These commands report the output format for lrecs and srecs and erec data in various formats such as ASCII without text ASCII with text or binary The following example shows the output format for lrecs is ASCII with text according to Table B 5 Send lrec format Receive lrec format 01 set lrec format format set srec format format set erec format format Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands set th
198. larm filter temp Reports sets filter temperature alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm filter temp Reports sets filter temperature alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm flame temp Reports sets flame temperature alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm flame temp Reports sets flame temperature alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm maximum value B 13 max alarm internal temp Reports sets internal temperature alarm minimum value B 13 min alarm level max Reports sets current THC concentration alarm maximum B 12 value alarm pressure air Reports sets air pressure alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm pressure air Reports sets air pressure alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm pressure fuel Reports sets fuel pressure alarm maximum value B 14 max alarm pressure fuel Reports sets fuel pressure alarm minimum value B 14 min alarm pressure Reports sets sample pressure alarm maximum value B 15 sample max alarm pressure Reports sets sample pressure alarm minimum value B 15 sample min alarm pump temp Reports sets pump temperature alarm maximum value B 15 max alarm pump temp Reports sets pump temperature alarm minimum value B 15 min alarm signal max Reports sets signal strength alarm maximum value B 16 alarm signal min Reports sets signal strength alarm minimum value B 16 alarm span noise Reports sets span noise alarm maximum value B 16 max alarm span noise Reports sets span noise alarm minim
199. lay asit cac tne tesa vane Ra oar medie on eicit B 28 Measurement Configuration ysis eciam estesa eene due B 30 Hardware Contorno dat B 32 Communications Configuration aret dai B 37 TOA TO A A octets B 44 Record Layout Definition dl ceci B 49 Format Specifier for ASCI Responses in B 49 Format Specifier for Binary Responses siria is B 49 Format Specifier for Erec Layout a iecore chi ete e B 50 A aub ea Bora inve ut bue d eaa RU dS B 50 Value nDA P B 50 Value SOURCE E A ape NU B 50 Alarm Information Se e eee ee mee Scu op uh B 51 Translation Tables a B 51 Selection E bi MEET Ei B 51 D ttott DESDE x DE RR INI THE TO RU M UN EIE B 51 A eea eiaa eaea eseina B 52 MODBUS Protocol cias iia C 1 Serial Communication Parameters us vacare Guo trei cals acia C 1 TCP Communication Parametros a C 2 Application Data Unit Denton C 2 A A CORE A E PD NA EAR C 2 MBAP Header cce eet tet eaae rv Rd isa deista C 2 boncaontC ode neo ose tiis et ERROR scat bes Dassin sb ani C 3 DAE qiu A cd eas dte aiaei C 3 Eror Bru MR HR C 3 Function CO C52 ni a ll C 3 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read puts dei C 3 0x03 0x04 Read Holding Registers Read Input Registers C 5 0x05 Force Write Single Coll iris C 7 MODBUS Parameters Supported acus e eo te eter eate C 8 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol sss D 1 Serial Communication Par
200. ld be considered However if an external pump is used the additional positive pressure should not be used to force the sample into the instrument Figure 2 3 Thermo Fisher Scientific ayer ON Venting the Bypass Thermo Fisher Scientific Installation Connecting Support Gases illustrates the atmospheric dump bypass plumbing required when an external pump is used Vent to Exhaust Line at Instrument Bulkhead Atmospheric Pressure V SS Y V XA M So Input Gas Line Figure 2 3 Atmospheric Dump Bypass Plumbing Note This arrangement is required only if sample is delivered to the analyzer under positive pressure A The 51 pump draws significandy more sample than is needed by the detector The excess sample gas is vented from the instrument through a bypass port located on the rear panel For most applications it is not necessary to connect the bypass to a vent or scrubber However if the Model 51 is located in an enclosure or if hazardous samples are being monitored it may be necessary to run the bypass exhaust back to the source or to a vent to avoid build up of hazardous sample gases inside an enclosed space or in the work area If exhaust lines or scrubbers are added care should be taken to limit the build up of back pressure If long exhaust lines are needed increasing the vent tube diameter will help prevent excessive back pressure WARNING The bypass or sample gas exhaust contain
201. le filter element Equipment Required Wrench 1 inch Long Philips head screwdriver Teflon pipe thread tape Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component For more information about appropriate safety precautions see the Servicing chapter A 1 Shut off the main power and remove the instrument cover Using the Philips head screwdriver loosen the eight thumb screws remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool 2 Using the 1 inch wrench remove the filter assembly cap nut Figure 5 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual 5 3 Preventive Maintenance Internal Sample Filter Cleaning 5 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Note This nut may be very difficult to move Be careful not to bend any of the 1 8 inch tubing attached to the filter assembly while undoing the cap nut A 3 Remove the filter element from the assembly base Gently dislodge the element from the base with a screwdriver if necessary Using a clean air supply or other clean compressed gas gently blow any dust or particles out of the base Do not lose the aluminum o ring in the base Using a clean air supply or other clean compressed gas blow any dust or particular out of the filter element Note that if the filter cannot be cleaned adequately with air it may be cleaned with methanol or acetone in an a
202. ller s Remove the fittings from the discarded controller s and install them in the new controller in the same manner To install the new controller s follow the previous steps in reverse Make sure all fo the fittings on the controller assembly are tight Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pressure Regulator Replacement Controller Mounting Hardware backside of mounting bracket RJ 45 Cable Socket Back Pressure Controller Air Controller Fuel Controller Figure 7 16 Replacing the Pressure Controllers Pressure Regulator Use the following procedure to replace the pressure regulator Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Wrench open end 7 16 inch Philips screwdriver Adjustable pliers wide jaw Hex wrench set Teflon pipe thread tape amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A T Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 37 Servicing Pressure Regulator Replacement Pressure Gauge 7 38 Model 51i Instruction Manual Shut down the instrument combustion air supply and remove the inlet and outlet tube fittings from the pressure regulator Note the location of each tube to facilitate re connection Remove the pressure gauge and clean any remaining pipe
203. lowing procedure to replace the optional I O expansion board Figure 7 20 Equipment Required I O expansion board Nut driver 3 16 inch Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 57 Servicing 1 0 Expansion Board Optional Replacement 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Unplug the I O expansion board cable from the EXPANSION BD connector on the motherboard 3 Remove the two standoffs holding the I O expansion board connector to the rear panel Figure 7 21 4 Pop the board off of the mounting studs and remove the board 5 To install the I O expansion board follow the previous steps in reverse 6 Calibrate the analog current outputs and analog voltage inputs as defined earlier in this chapter Motherboard Digital Output Board 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Figure 7 20 Replacing the 0 Expansion Board Optional 7 58 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Digital Output Board Replacement 1 0 Expansion Board Motherboard Digital Output Board Figure 7 21 Rear Panel Board Connectors Dig ital Outp ut Board Use the following procedure to replace the digital output board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required
204. m restrictions it may be turned off in the Instrument Controls IO Configuration Analog Output Config screens Verify that the recorder or data logger input impedance meets minimum requirements Run test of analog outputs under Diagnostics menu Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages Action Replace fan if not operating properly Clean or replace foam filter refer to Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual Check 10K thermistor on measurement interface board replace if bad Alarm Detector Temp Failed heater or sensor Check temperatures in diagnostic screen Check heaters for open or short circuits Check thermocouples for open or short circuits Alarm Filter Temp Failed heater or sensor Check temperatures in diagnostic screen Check heaters for open or short circuits Check thermocouples for open or short circuits Alarm Pump Temp Failed heater or sensor Check temperatures in diagnostic screen Check heaters for open or short circuits Check thermocouples for open or short circuits Alarm Flame Out Alarm Sample Pressure Gas supply failure Pressure high or low Check gas pressures Check the pump for a tear in the diaphragm replace with pump repair kit if necessary Refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarm Message Alarm Fuel Pressure Possible Cause Pressure low Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
205. maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 50000 01 1 5 1 and 5 if in percent The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value If the concentration goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Concentration ERED RA haa The Minimum Concentration alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum concentration alarm limit The minimum and maximum concentration alarm limit screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentration gt Min or Max The Minimum Trigger screen allows the user to view and set the minimum concentration alarm trigger type to either floor or ceiling The minimum alarm may be programmed as a floor trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration falls below the minimum value or a ceiling trigger alarm is triggered when the concentration goes above the minimum value e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Concentration gt Min Trigger Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 69 Operation Service Menu DH Guided Piet Service Menu The Service menu appears only when the instrument is in the service mode When service mod
206. me Detection Qu Di The Instrument Idle Mode screen is used to turn off the pump and the hydrogen which extinguishes the flame but leaves the heaters running so the instrument stays at temperature Turning idle mode back to OFF will re start pump and initiate the flame ignition sequence e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Idle Mode ERE CH Pi Tite DH DEB PEBCLIL The Set Pressure and Flow screen is similar to the Gas Pressures screen in the Instrument Control menu in that it is used to view and adjust the set pressures for the sample air hydrogen and mixed fuel Again two pressures are specified for each gas one for igniting the flame and the other Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 71 Operation Service Menu for running the analyzer in normal operation Acceptable pressure ranges are 0 15 psi for the sample and 0 50 psi for the air and fuels Unlike the Gas Pressures screen this screen does not allow pressures to be adjusted while the flame is still lit This is because when a pressure is selected for adjustment the firmware shuts off all other gases This makes it easy to measure the selected gas flow from the exhaust bulkhead on the rear panel Regarding setting the fuel pressures it is important to note whether hydrogen or mixed fuel is the selected fuel and adjust those pressures accordingly When adjusting any of the fuel pressures it is not necessary to manually turn on the fuel solenoid The analyze
207. mple back pressure controller is the electronic pressure controller that is used to stabilize the sample pressure at the FID inlet The sample pressure regulator is adjusted at the factory to provide 18 to 22 psi inlet pressure to the electronic controller The analyzer utilizes electronic pressure controllers and fixed flow restrictors to control the flow rate of fuel combustion air and sample going to the FID The electronic pressure controllers utilize pressure sensors and temperature compensated electronic proportional valves in a closed loop control system to provide a fixed gas pressure to flow restrictors located in the base of the FID The pressure controller assembly consists of three closed loop pressure controllers one 0 15 psi and two 0 50 psi controllers pressurizing thermally stable restrictors to provide smooth consistent gas flow to the FID Each controller is individually adjustable from the front panel allowing the user to set the pressure control values and receive readings corresponding to the actual regulated output pressures The overall pressure control scheme used by the analyzer allows the controllers to regulate both Thermo Fisher Scientific Fuel Shutoff Solenoid Zero Span Solenoids Firmware Instrument Control Monitoring Signals Thermo Fisher Scientific System Description Firmware the ignition and running pressure settings These pressure settings provide separate discrete control of all g
208. n ignite and the other is used during normal operation run Acceptable pressure ranges are 0 15 psi for the sample and 0 50 for the air and fuels WARNING Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Gas Pressures Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu EH DHOB A ALPES The following example sets the SAMPLE RUN pressure to 6 9 psi All of the other set pressure screens function the same way PB POTENT CH CHEM USE CIL i el Re 4o gPPegd s PuLPPPG Select Fuel The Select Fuel screen is used to select the fuel type either hydrogen or mixed so that the corresponding pressures set in the gas pressures screen will be utilized e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Select Fuel RSE Bis EEE TE Bone Response Factor The Response Factor screen allows the user to define a multiplier that is Thermo Fisher Scientific automatically applied to the THC measurement before the concentration is displayed on the front panel It can be used to compensate for differences in the FID s sensitivity to the calibration gas and the actual sample For example if the 517 is calibrated with propane and then used to monitor hexane the ppm based THC readings will indicate a concentration approximately double the actual value This occurs because the FID response depends on both the concentration of the hydrocarbon a
209. n Manual 8 3 System Description Hardware Flame lonization Detector FID Sample Filter Internal Pump Sample Pressure Regulator Electronic Pressure Controllers 8 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual The Flame Ionization Detector FID quantifies the hydrocarbon concentration by measuring the current that flows between two electrodes when organic compounds are burned in a hydrogen air flame The in line sample filter is located just upstream of the pump and protects the pump and flow restrictors from particulate matter in the sample stream The filter assembly contains a cup shaped sintered metal element that can be cleaned or replaced by the user The standard element is rated for removal of particulate down to 2 microns Additional external filtering is strongly recommended for applications that involve high levels of fine particulate such as monitoring of cement kilns The internal pump draws sample into the analyzer and into the oven through the sample inlet port The sample is delivered to the FID under positive pressure The internal pump has a nominal flow rate of approximately 0 8 liters per minute and has adequate head pressure to draw sample through 100 feet of 1 4 inch OD sample line The pump head is heated in the HT version of the analyzer The sample pressure regulator is used to step down the incoming pressure of the combustion air so that the air source can be used to feed the sample back pressure controller The sa
210. n example translation table would be Code_0 Code_1 Code_2 Code_3 The value once extracted is used as a zero based index into the translation table to determine the string to display Then there appears an optional selection table within parentheses This is a string of numbers separated by spaces 0 1 The selection table lists the translation table entries which the user may select from when setting the parameter This is not necessarily the same as the entries which may be displayed Then there appears an optional button designator This will be one of B T ES T Or NC B Indicates a button which pops up an input dialog prompting the user for a new value using the designated input format The input format is specified from the B through the subsequent semicolon Model 51i Instruction Manual B 51 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Examples B 52 Model 51i Instruction Manual I Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with input translation That is the values read are translated before they are compared to the selection list options L Indicates a button which pops up a selection list without any translation The output value is the number of the selected option T Indicates a button which pops up a selection list with output translation The number of the option selected is used as an index into the translation table to generate an output string N Indicates a button
211. nd the Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 21 Operation Instrument Controls Menu number of carbon atoms in the individual molecules Hexane CH 4 has twice as many carbon atoms per molecule as propane C3Hs and therefore produces approximately double the signal If a response factor of 0 5 is applied the hexane concentration would then read correctly If the composition of the sample gas is known the response factor can be determined and programmed into the analyzer Once programmed the 517 automatically compensates for the difference in molecular structure by applying the response factor before the data is displayed In most cases the exact sample composition is unknown or variable In those cases the response factor should be set to 1 0 which has no effect on the THC reading e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Response Factor Pump Settings The Pump Settings screen is used to change the operating state of the pump Settings include Always On Always Off and Off Until Warm where the pump remains off until the oven reaches the set temperature Note The pump setting should usually be Off Until Warm This prevents condensation from occurring in the pump head at start up A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pump Settings Datalogging Settings The Series instruments include a built in datalogging capability as a standard feature The operator is allowed to create two differen
212. nd turn the pump on From Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 15 Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version 7 16 Model 51i Instruction Manual the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Pump Settings Listen closely for a knocking sound that would indicate that the clamping disk is hitting the intermediate plate If you do hear a knocking sound equally loosen the four head nuts until the sound just disappears Make sure that the cap nuts and spring washers are properly engaged 17 Allow the instrument to come up to full operating temperature then check for knocking as described in the previous step Verify that the pump is working correctly by checking the flow rate at the sample inlet bulkhead and the sample pressure reported in the Diagnostic menu The pump should draw at least 700 cc per minute of sample Cap nut 4x Spring washer 28x A Heodplote Valveplote 2x O ring 2x Intermediate plate Clomping disc Waved diaphragm 2x Connection rod disc Support ring Insulation ring 2x Noise dompener 6x Spocer pipe 4x Shim rings 5x Threaded rod 4x Connection rod extension Sel screw Figure 7 7 Rebuilding the Pump New Technology Heated Head Version Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version For older models repair kit part number 18070 use the following procedure to replace the heated head pump diaphragm and valve plate fo
213. nds on page D 3 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the Series to support Geysitech protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 51i Instruction Manual D 1 Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Instrument Address Abbreviations Used Basic Command Structure D 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the Geysitech protocol over TCP IP The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for Geysitech 9882 The Geysitech instrument address has a value between 0 and 127 and is represented by a 3 digit ASCII number with leading zeros or leading spaces if required e g instrument address of 1 is represented as 001 or lt SP gt lt SP gt 1 The instrument address is the same as the Instrument ID used for C Link and MODBUS commands This can be set via the front panel The instrument address is represented by lt address gt in the examples throughout this document Note Device IDs 128 through 247 are not supported because of limitations imposed by the C Link protocol A The following is a list of abbreviations used in this document CR is abbreviation for Carriage Return ASCII code
214. nk Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 48 Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 Flame Temp 9 Int Temp 10 Air PSI 11 Sample PSI 12 Fuel PSI 13 Raw Hz relay stat This command reports the current relay logic as normally open or normally closed if all the relays are set to same state that is all open or all closed The following example shows that the status of all the relays logic is set to normally open Send relay stat Receive relay stat open Note If individual relays have been assigned different logic then the response would be a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the least significant byte LSB being relay no 1 A For example Receive relay stat 0x0001 indicates relay no 1 is set to normally open logic all others are normally closed Receive relay stat 0x0005 indicates relay no 1 and 3 are set to be normally open logic all others are normally closed set relay open set relay open value set relay closed set relay closed value These commands set the relay logic to normally open or closed for relay number value where value is the relay between 1 and 16 The following example sets the relay no 1 logic to normally open Note If the command is sent without an appended relay number then all the relays are assigned the set logic of normally open closed A Send set relay open 1 Receive set relay open 1 ok Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Record Layo Ut
215. non alarm to choose from e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State DH HOM PLP The Alarms screen allows the user to select an alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by lt after it Pump temperature is only available in the HT Model The I O board status alarm is only present if the I O expansion board is installed Zero and Span Check Cal are only present if the automated zero span check is enabled Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu See the Alarms Menu section later in this chapter for more information on alarm items e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Output Relay Settings select Relay Instrument State Alarms Non Alarm The Non Alarm screen allows the user to select a non alarm status for the selected relay output The currently selected item is shown by after it The zero span and sample modes are only present if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Output Relay Settings gt select Relay gt Instrument State gt Non Alarm Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 41 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH Dh PIL i Digital Input Settings The Digital Input Settings menu displays a list
216. nostic voltage measurements on the I O expansion board The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt iob Receive diag volt iob 23 96 4 96 3 27 3 16 flags This command reports all of the currently active measurement status flags in plain ASCII text If no measurement alarms are active the response is flags no alarm active If any alarms are active they are reported as follows Send Receive flags flags Bad cal Can not light Cal mode High conc alarm Overrange Idle Mode High det base temp Low det base temp High filter temp Low filter temp High pump temp Model 51iHT Low pump temp Model 51iHT High flame temp Low flame temp clr records This command will clear all lrecs and srecs that have been saved Send Receive clr records clr records ok set clr lrecs set clr srecs Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging These commands will clear only the lrecs or only the srecs that have been saved The following example clears srecs Send set clr srecs Receive set clr srecs ok data treatment lrec data treatment srec These commands report the current selection of data treatment for concentrations in the lrecs or srecs The following example reports the data treatment for concentrations in lrec as minimum Send data treatment lrec Receiv
217. ntific Alarm Information Translation Table Selection Table Button Designator Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Floating point numbers can be followed with an optional precision specifier which will be used as an argument to printf s f format for example a field of 4 would be translated into the printf command of 3f Alternately the special character can precede the precision specifier this causes an indirection on the precision specifier which now becomes a field number This is useful when formatting for example numbers which have varying precision depending on the mode of the instrument Binary numbers can also have an optional precision specifier which is used to determine how many bits to print For example the specifier b4 will print the lowest four bits of the parsed number There are serious restrictions on where an s field may appear currently sources 1 and 2 must be s and no others may be s The value source is followed by optional alarm information indicated by a commercial at sign with a source indicator and a starting bit indicator All alarm information is presumed to be two bits long low and high The bitfield extraction is performed on the integer part of the source Typical alarm information would appear as 26 4 Then there appears an optional translation table within braces This is a string of words separated by spaces A
218. nts or diagnosing problems The Technical Support Department at Thermo Fisher Scientific can also be consulted in the event of problems See Service Locations on page 6 22 for contact information In any correspondence with the factory please note both the serial number and program number of the instrument This chapter provides the following troubleshooting and service support information e Safety Precautions on page 6 1 e Firmware Diagnostic Information on page 6 1 e Troubleshooting Guides on page 6 2 e Board Level Connection Diagrams on page 6 8 e Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 e Service Locations on page 6 22 Read the safety precautions in the Preface and Servicing chapter before performing any actions listed in this chapter Diagnostic information that might be useful in troubleshooting hardware problems can be found in the Diagnostics menu The Diagnostics menu presents a series of information screens that are organized to show pressures voltages temperatures or other information describing the Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Troubleshooting Guides 6 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual analyzer s current state Table 6 1 is a list of the analyzer s diagnostics and the expected range of values for each variable Table 6 1 Model 51 Firmware Diagnostic Information Flame Temperature Hydrogen fuel 165 to 2
219. o B 22 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Tables Table 1 1 Model 517 Specifications ssssssssssss 1 5 Table 2 1 O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions ssssssss 2 0 Table 2 2 Default Analog Outputs 2 9 Table 2 3 D O Terminal Board Pin Descriptions sssss 2 10 Table 2 4 25 Pin Terminal Board Pin Descriptions sss 2 11 Table 3 1 Front Panel Pushbuttons eec o e t tr bobus 3 3 Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs 3 10 Table 3 3 Analog Output Zero to Full Scale sssssss 3 45 Table 3 4 Signal Type Group ChOICES coooonicoocinconinccnnocinonccnnnonnncnnnncnnoooo 3 46 Table 6 1 Model 517 Firmware Diagnostic Information 6 2 Table 6 2 Troubleshooting General Guide sssss 6 2 Table 6 3 Troubleshooting Alarm Messages ssssssss 6 6 Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions ss 6 10 Table 6 5 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 15 Table 6 6 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 17 Table 6 7 0 Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions 6 19 Table 6 8 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions 6 20 Table 6 9 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions sss 6 22 T
220. o Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration Note If the instrument is in a mode which does not provide a particular output and that output is selected the value will be 0 0 A All channel ranges are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A Table B 16 Default Analog Output Channel Assignments D to A Function Parameter 1 Voltage Output THC 2 Voltage Output THC 3 Voltage Output Not Assigned 4 Voltage Output Not Assigned 5 Voltage Output Not Assigned 6 Voltage Output Not Assigned 7 Current Output THC 8 Current Output THC 9 Current Output Not Assigned 10 Current Output Not Assigned 11 Current Output Not Assigned 12 Current Output Not Assigned list var aout list var dout list var din These commands report the list of index numbers and the variables associated with that index number available for selection in the current mode for analog outputs digital outputs and digital inputs The index number is used to insert the variable in a field location in a list using set sp field index The following example reports the list of analog outputs index numbers and variables Send list var aout Receive list var aout index variable O none 1 THC 2 THC_Avg 3 THC High 4 THC Low 5 6 Det Temp Filt Temp Model 51i Instruction Manual B 47 C Li
221. o clean the LCD module but rather use a soft cloth moistened with a naphtha cleaning solvent A Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 3 Servicing Firmware Updates Firmware Updates Accessing the Service Mode 7 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Do not place the LCD module near organic solvents or corrosive gases A Do not shake or jolt the LCD module A N A e ea Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap The firmware can be updated by the user in the field via the serial port or over the Ethernet This includes both the main processor firmware and the firmware in all low level processors Refer to the Port manual for the firmware update procedure If the Service menu is not displayed on the Main Menu use the following procedure to display it 1 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Service Mode The Service Mode screen appears 2 Press to toggle the Service Mode to ON 3 Press W gt W to return to the Main Menu 4 Return to the procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Replacement Parts Thermo Fisher Scientific List Servicing Replacement Parts List Table 7 1 lists the replacement parts for both the Model 51 High Temperature and the Model 51 Low Temperature major subassemblies Refer to Figure 7 2 and Figure 7 3 to identify the component location Table 7 1 Model 51 Replacement Parts Part Number Des
222. of 0 100 ppm sets the analog output to concentrations between 0 and 100 ppm Available ranges include 1 10 100 1000 5000 10000 and 50000 01 1 5 1 and 5 if in percent C1 C2 and C3 are custom ranges For more information about custom ranges see Set Custom Ranges below The display shows the current THC range The next line of the display is used to change the range e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Select Range Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 9 Operation Range Menu DH DM 5 Fiker lisit The analog outputs are arranged on the rear panel connector as shown in Figure 3 4 See Table 3 2 for channels and pin connections o000000000000000000 c000000000000000000 O Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector Table 3 2 Default Analog Outputs Channel Connector Pin 1 0 Terminal Pin Description 1 14 1 THC Analog Output 2 33 3 THC Analog Output 3 15 5 None 4 34 7 None 5 17 9 None 6 36 11 None Ground 16 18 19 35 37 2 4 6 8 10 12 Signal Ground Note All channels are user definable If any customization has been made to the analog output configuration the default selections may not apply A 3 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Set Custom Ranges Custom Ranges Averaging Time Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Averaging Time The Set Custom Ranges menu lists three custom ranges which are user defined Any value b
223. of the 16 digital inputs available and allows the user to select the logic state and instrument parameter for the relay selected Note The digital inputs must be asserted for at least one second for the action to be activated A Note Not all of the I O available in the instrument are brought out on the supplied terminal board If more I O is desired an alternative means of connection is required See optional Terminal Block and Cable Kits A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt I O Configuration gt Digital Input Settings Logic State The Logic State menu item is used to change the selected I O relay to either normally open or normally closed The default state is open which indicates that a relay connected between the digital input pin and ground is normally open and closes to trigger the digital input action e Press to toggle and set the logic state to normally open or normally closed 3 42 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu Pop HEURE PIE T EUs ETE CELL PDT Re 4 PERI Co pb motel Instrument Action The Instrument Action submenu allows the user to choose the instrument action that is assigned to the selected digital input The zero and span modes are only present if the zero span valve option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls I O Configuration Digital Input Settings select Relay Instrument Action
224. oie ec aa pe te deber e t d pass 4 1 Frequency of Calibration ee bed terae iret bant uabg 4 2 Selecting Calibration Gases aii cit 4 2 LEO Si AA 4 2 Span Gas Compost 4 3 Selecting Span Gas Concentration ntc 4 4 Response Factors and Choice of Concentration Units 4 4 Connecting Calibration Gases iia 4 5 Calibration Menus inca ard a 4 7 Manual Calibration Procedure eui dec ett etis 4 7 Backeroiutd Zero Adjusted dete pe ash e albe pie 4 8 Spam Ad USB gs sod at ate ace area ea 4 9 Fully Automated Zero and Span Checks and Adjustments 4 9 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance seeeeeeeeeenennnntente tnnt 5 1 A ettet a be Meade 5 1 Cleaning the Outside Cases eat 5 2 Visual Inspection and C eame occa ainda 5 2 Fan Filter Inspection and Cleaning viii ati 5 2 Internal Sample Filter Cleaning nta 5 3 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting niesna ataa aana 6 1 Safety DECO ereis a ROTE tH OA O EEE SES 6 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual ix Contents Chapter 7 x Model 51i Instruction Manual Firmware Diagnostic InfOrmatlOD teuer eeepc iade 6 1 Troubleshooting Guides urinaria 6 2 Boatd Level Connection Diagrams iii dica 6 8 Connector Pin Descriptions otro 6 10 Service LOCOS ic io ad 6 22 Servicing dt P RR IO AC EP T 7 1 Safety DIGCAULION SS Casse etri undsvwovevs p E 7 3 Firmware Updates se feces niche Iul bc usan Meda de eee 7 4 Accessing the Service Mode ou ast o ede e D Que
225. omatically A Format Specifier for The second line of the layout response is the binary parameter list for Binary Responses parsing the fields from a binary response Parameters MUST be separated by spaces and the line is terminated by a n Valid fields are t parse a time specifier 2 bytes D parse a date specifier 3 bytes i ignore one 8 bit character 1 byte e parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes n x E parse a 24 bit floating point number 3 bytes N x f parse a 32 bit floating point number 4 bytes Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual B 49 C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition Format Specifier for Erec Layout Text Value String Value Source B 50 Model 51i Instruction Manual c parse an 8 bit signed number 1 byte C parse an 8 bit unsigned number 1 byte n parse a 16 bit signed number 2 bytes N parse a 16 bit unsigned number 2 bytes m parse a 24 bit signed number 3 bytes M parse a 24 bit unsigned number 3 bytes parse a 32 bit signed number 4 bytes L parse a 32 bit unsigned number 4 bytes There is an optional single digit d which may follow any of the numeric fields which indicates that after the field has been parsed out the resulting value is to be divided by 104d Thus the 16 bit field OxFFC6 would be interpreted with the format specifier n3 as the number 0 058 The subsequent lines in the erec layout response d
226. on The Model 51 sampling and gas flow system is shown in Figure 1 2 The fuel and air that support the FID flame are provided from pressurized supplies that are connected to the instrument s rear panel The sample is drawn into the instrument using an internal vacuum pump that pulls sample through 1 4 inch outside diameter OD sample line The instrument air enters through the rear panel bulkhead as shown in Figure 1 2 Inside the instrument the air line splits with one branch running to an electronic pressure controller that supplies the FID Flow through this line is controlled by the combination of the pressure controller and a flow restrictor that is mounted in the base of the detector The second branch supplies make up air for controlling the sample pressure The flow rate of make up air is also controlled by an electronic pressure controller which automatically adjusts in response to changes in pressure in Model 51i Instruction Manual 1 3 Introduction Operating Principle of the Sampling and Flow Controls Jet 300 V FID Base 1 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual the sample line The manual pressure regulator protects the electronic pressure controller from overpressurization Rear Panel y Oven Wall i A So 9 m FID Exhaust Collector M Exhaust Flow Restrictor Signal Post Sample Flow Restrictor gt e gt By Pass Sample Exhaust lt e E a e X amp Sample Inlet Capilliary Restrictor
227. on Codes below In MODBUS over serial an error check is included in the message This is not necessary in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols ensure error free transmission The error check is a two byte 16 bit CRC value This section describes the various function codes that are supported by the Model 51i Read Coils Inputs read the status of the digital outputs relays in the instrument Issuing either of these function codes will generate the same response These requests specify the starting address i e the address of the first output specified and the number of outputs The outputs are addressed starting at zero Therefore outputs numbered 1 16 are addressed as 0 15 Model 51i Instruction Manual C 3 MODBUS Protocol Function Codes C 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual The outputs in the response message are packed as one per bit of the data field Status is indicated as 1 Active on and 0 Inactive off The LSB of the first data byte contains the output addressed in the query The other outputs follow toward the high end of this byte and from low order to high order in subsequent bytes If the returned output quantity is not a multiple of eight the remaining bits in the final data byte will be padded with zeros toward the high order end of the byte The Byte Count field specifies the quantity of complete bytes of data Note The values reported may not reflect the state of the actual relays in t
228. on The Input Board Calibration menu is used to initiate a calibration of the input board A D stages Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration prak prup Di PT EH DHOBM Pp LES Evi Bab i Manual Input Calibration The Manual Input Calibration screen is used to do a manual calibration of the input board A D stages per the following procedure Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 73 Operation Service Menu Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A 1 In the Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Manual Input Cal 2 Press to leave warning screen 3 Make a note of the frequency at gain of 1 4 Use Jand gt to change the gain from 1 to 100 5 Use f Jand 4 to increment or decrement the D A counts so the frequency at gain 100 matches or is slightly above the frequency at gain 1 within 50 counts 6 Press to save new input board calibration Automatic Input Calibration The Automatic Input Calibration screen is used to do an automatic calibration of the input board A D stages A message will be displayed after the optimum setting has been determined Note The flame must not be lit when performing an input board calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service gt Input Board Calibration gt Automatic Input Cal
229. one that the instrument is located in If the exact timezone is not shown in the list it may be entered via the C LINK tz command see Appendix B The selections are UTC GMT EST GMT 5 CST GMT 6 MST GMT 7 PST GMT 8 YST GMT 9 HST GMT 10 NST GMT 11 DLW GMT 12 CET GMT 1 EET GMT 2 BST GMT 3 DLT GMT 4 ECH GMT 5 FOX GMT 6 GLF GMT 7 CCT GMT 8 JST GMT 9 GST GMT 10 LMA GMT 11 DLE GMT 12 EDT GMT 5 4 CDT GMT 6 5 MDT GMT 7 6 and PDT GMT 8 7 Note The current timezone may say NULL before the timezone is set for the first time or if the timezone was cleared with a C Link command A e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Timezone Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu provides access to diagnostic information and functions including flame ignition This menu is useful when troubleshooting the instrument The analog input readings and analog input voltages are only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics 3 52 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu o EH Cika Program Versions The Program Versions screen read only shows the version numbers of the programs installed Prior to contacting the factory with any questions regarding the instrument please note the product model name 51 HT or 51 LT and the program version numbers e Inthe Main Menu choo
230. ontrols Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings gt Serial Settings gt RS 232 485 Selection Instrument ID The Instrument ID screen allows the operator to edit the instrument ID number The ID is used to identify the instrument when using the C Link or MODBUS protocols to control the instrument or collect data It may be necessary to edit the ID number if two or more instruments of the same model are connected to one computer Valid instrument ID numbers are from 0 to 127 The Model 51 has a default instrument ID of 51 For more information about the instrument ID see Appendix B C Link Protocol or Appendix C MODBUS Protocol e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Instrument ID E E jb por m Pria riy c i d init Communication Protocol The Communication Protocol screen is used to change the protocol for serial communications Possible choices include C Link MODBUS Geysitech and Streaming Data e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Communication Protocol Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 33 Operation Instrument Controls Menu DH piber fo a d Streaming Data Configuration The Streaming Data Configuration menu is used to allow for configuration of the 8 streaming data output items streaming interval current data format and current timestamp setting The Choose Stream D
231. or off DHCP is used to assign an IP address to the instrument automatically The following example shows that DHCP is on Send dhcp Receive dhcp on set dhcp onoff onoff on off This command enables oz and disables off the DHCP service When DHCP is set to on the instrument gets the IP address the netmask address and the gateway address from a DHCP server When DHCP is set to off the instrument gets these addresses from system memory The following example sets the DHCP service to on Note If DHCP is changed from on to off and then the IP address the netmask address or the gateway address is changed you must cycle power to the instrument before the change takes effect Until you cycle the power the address assigned by the DHCP server will still be used and reported as the current address A Model 51i Instruction Manual B 39 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 40 Model 51i Instruction Manual Send set dhcp on Receive set dhcp on ok format This command reports the current reply termination format The following example shows that the reply format is 00 which means reply with no checksum according to Table B 10 Send format Receive format 00 set format format This command sets the reply termination format where format is set according to Table B 10 The following example sets the reply termination format to checksum Send set format 01 Receive set format 01 ok Table B 1
232. or other operations in this menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Datalogging Settings Select Srec Lrec Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 23 Operation Instrument Controls Menu View Logged Data The View Logged Data screen is used to select the starting point to view the logged data by the number of records or by date and time Note that both types of records cannot be viewed at the same time only the selected record type e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings View Logged Data Number of Records The Number of Records screen is used to select the number of records to view ending with the most recent It also shows the total number of records that have been logged for the selected record type The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records O PILQOPUPMPO Date and Time The Date and Time screen is used to set a start date and time for which to view logged data For example if 20 Jan 2007 10 00 is entered then the 3 24 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu first logged data record that is displayed is the first record after this time If set to one minute logging this would be at 20 Jan 2007 10 01 I5RHZE CH PP Tite i i mies Prid YU Lir The Record Display screen read only displays the selected records Pre irog ER haa Erase Lo
233. ose Alarms Air Pressure EH DH Min and Max Air The Minimum Air Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the Pressure Limits minimum air pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum air pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Air Pressure Min or Max EH DHOBM Bias Voltage The Bias Voltage screen displays the current bias voltage reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 325 to 275 V If the bias voltage reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Bias Voltage Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 65 Operation Alarms Menu Min and Max Bias Voltage Limits Signal Strength Min and Max Signal Strength Limits 3 66 Model 51i Instruction Manual DHT Dy nw Dn The Minimum Bias Voltage alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum bias voltage alarm limit The minimum and maximum bias voltage screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Bias Voltage Min or Max DH sud Piet The Signal Strength screen displays the signal strength reading taken during the most recent calibration and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 001 to 100 000 If the s
234. oubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description NC NC 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24 MONITOR 24V Power Monitor Ground FRONT PANEL BD cO a N oon A CO N gt gt o gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt co co N o a 99 N N N N N N FP wo N gt gt O Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal LD5 LCD Signal LD1 LCD Signal LD6 LCD Signal LD2 LCD Signal LD7 LCD Signal LD3 LCD Signal LCD Bias Voltage 5V Ground Ground LCD_ONOFF LCD Signal Keypad Row 2 Input Keypad Row 1 Input Keypad Row 4 Input Keypad Row 3 Input Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 13 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Label Reference Designator Pin CO CO CO CO CO N N N N N FP 0 N O cO CO N DD OI Signal Description Keypad Col 2 Select Keypad Col 1 Select Keypad Col 4 Select Keypad Col 3 Select Ground Ground Ground Ground 24V 24V RS232 RS485 A PTA cO CO N O Ci A CO N NC Serial Port 1 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 1 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 1 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 1 CTS RS485 IN NC RS232 RS485 B cO OO nN on CO DN NC Serial Port 2 RX RS485 IN Serial Port 2 TX RS485 OUT NC Ground NC Serial Port 2 RTS RS485 OUT Serial Port 2 CTS RS485 IN NC AC
235. ough Connectors Remove Screw Loosen Captive Partition Panel Screw Remove Screws Remove Screw LOWER PANEL Remove Hidden Screw Figure 7 4 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel High Temperature shown Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 7 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Pump Replacement Thermo Fisher Scientific 10 Servicing Pump Replacement Turn the instrument OFF and unplug the power cord If the instrument is mounted in a rack remove it from the rack Remove the cover Disconnect the three connectors that pass through the center of the P g partition panel that connect to the measurement interface board Remove two screws from the left side rear of the case viewed from front Remove one screw from the bottom rear of the case Remove one screw from the top front of the partition panel While holding the case securely loosen the captive screw at the rear of the measurement case assembly and pull the measurement case assembly from the rear of the case Remove the screw at the top rear of the partition panel that secures the top of the panel to the measurement case assembly and lower the panel being careful not to put exce
236. outputs 0 100 mV 1 5 10 V user selectable 596 of full scale over under range user selectable 12 bit resolution measurement output user selectable per channel Digital outputs 1 power fail relay Form C 10 relays Form A user selectable alarm output relay logic 100 mA 200 VDC Digital inputs 16 digital inputs user select programmable TTL level pulled high Serial Ports 1 RS 232 or RS 485 with two connectors baud rate Ethernet connection Support Gases Combustion air 1200 115200 data bits parity and stop bits protocols C Link MODBUS Geysitech Bayern Hessen and streaming data all user selectable RJ45 connector for 10 Mbs Ethernet connection static or dynamic TCP IP addressing up to 3 simultaneous connections per protocol Approximately 150 to 300 milliliters per minute required see test sheet for exact flow settings Total consumption approximately 1 0 LPM Fuel Approximately 10 to 35 milliliters per minute hydrogen or 50 to 120 milliliter per minute hydrogen helium mix see test sheet for exact flow settings Calibration gases Hydrocarbon free zero air or nitrogen and span mixture of methane propane or hexane in air or nitrogen balance Exact span composition varies with the application Approximately 2 liters required per calibration cycle Thermo Fisher Scientific Lifting A Unpacking and Thermo Fisher Scientific Inspection Chapter 2 In
237. ovides an overview of product features describes the principles of operation and lists the specifications Chapter 2 Installation describes how to unpack setup and startup the analyzer Chapter 3 Operation describes the front panel display screens the front panel pushbuttons and the menu driven firmware Chapter 4 Calibration provides the procedures for calibrating the analyzer and describes the required equipment Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance provides maintenance procedures to ensure reliable and consistent instrument operation Chapter 6 Troubleshooting presents guidelines for diagnosing analyzer failures isolating faults and includes recommended actions for restoring proper operation Chapter 7 Servicing presents safety alerts for technicians working on the analyzer step by step instructions for repairing and replacing components and a replacement parts list It also includes contact information for product support and technical information Chapter 8 System Description describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections Chapter 9 Optional Equipment describes the optional equipment that can be used with this analyzer Appendix A Warranty is a copy of the warranty statement Appendix B C Link Protocol Commands provides a de
238. p Solenoid Control SPAN2 CAL J19 1 24V 2 Span2 Cal Solenoid Control SPAN1 INJ J20 1 24V 2 Span1 Inject Solenoid Control ZERO BF J21 1 24V 2 Zero Back Flush Solenoid Control FUEL J22 1 24V 2 Fuel Solenoid Control INPUT BD J23 1 15V 2 Ground 3 15V 4 5V 5 Ground 6 Measurement Frequency Output 7 Amplifier Zero Adjust Voltage 8 SPI Output 9 SPI Clock 10 SPI Board Select AIR CNTRL J24 1 24V 2 Ground 3 No Connection 6 16 Model 51 Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Reference Label Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description Air Pressure In Air Pressure Control FUEL CNTRL J25 D oO A CO N 24V Ground No Connection Fuel Pressure In Fuel Pressure Control No Connection BP CARR CNTRL J26 0 OC FP CO N 24V Ground No Connection Back Press Carrier Press In Back Press Carrier Press Control No Connection No Connection IGN BIAS J27 ow N Ignite Voltage Ground Bias Voltage MEAS OUT J32 Measurement Output Ground Table 6 6 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Label Designator MOTHERBOARD J1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Pin cO OO Y on CO NY Signal Description Ground Ground LCLK LCD Signal Ground Ground LLP LCD Signal LFLM LCD Signal LD4 LCD Signal LDO LCD Signal Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 17
239. p of the measurement interface board Pop the measurement interface board off of the two bottom mounting studs and remove the board 4 To install the measurement interface board follow the previous steps in reverse 5 Re install the measurement case assembly 6 Calibrate the input board and the ambient temperature sensor as defined earlier in this chapter and re calibrate the unit with zero air and span gas Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 61 Servicing Front Panel Board Replacement Mounting Studs 2 Mounting Screws 2 Measurement Interface Board Figure 7 22 Replacing the Measurement Interface Board Front Panel Board Use the following procedure to replace the front panel board Figure 7 Replacement Equipment Required Front panel board Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the three ribbon cables and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Pop the board off of the two top mounting studs and remove the board by lifting it up and off the slotted bottom support 4 Replace the front panel board by following the previous steps in reverse 7 62 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Mounting Studs 2 Ribbon Cables 3 LCD
240. p temp 200 0 deg C thc value avg value high value low value These commands report the measured THC AVG THC HI THC and LO THC concentrations The following example shows that the THC concentration is 40 ppb Send the Receive thc 4 000E 01 ppb alarm bias voltage min alarm bias voltage max These commands report the current bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the bias voltage alarm minimum value is 325 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 11 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual Send alarm bias voltage min Receive alarm bias voltage min 325 V set alarm bias voltage min value set alarm bias voltage max value These commands set the bias voltage alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the bias voltage alarm limits The following example sets the bias voltage alarm maximum value to 275 Send set alarm bias voltage max 275 Receive set alarm bias voltage max 275 ok alarm conc min alarm conc max alarm level max These commands report the current THC concentration alarm minimum and maximum values settings The following example reports that the THC concentration minimum is 100 ppb Send alarm conc min Receive alarm conc min 100 000 ppb set alarm conc min value set alarm conc max value set alarm level max value These commands set the THC concentration alarm minimum
241. pad list The scratch pad is a temporary memory area which is used to set up lists of selections for lrec srec or streaming data items The user can copy any of these lists to the scratch pad modify individual elements in the list then save the scratch pad back to the original list The following example shows that field 5 in the scratch pad is set to index number 12 which is for the fuel pressure Send sp field 5 Receive sp field 5 12 fuel psi set sp field number value number 1 32 for lrec and srec lists 1 8 for streaming data lists This command sets the scratch pad field number item number in scratch pad list to value where value is the index number of a variable in the Model 51i Instruction Manual B 25 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging analog output variable list Available variables and their corresponding index numbers may be obtained using the command list var aout The set sp field command is used to create a list of variables which can then be transferred into the lrec srec or streaming data lists using the set copy sp to lrec set copy sp to srec or set copy sp to stream commands Send set sp field 1 5 Receive set sp field 1 5 ok stream per This command reports the current time interval in seconds for streaming data The following example reports the streaming period is set to 10 seconds Send stream per Receive stream per 10 set stream per number value number value
242. play as ZERO or SPAN For more information about the optional solenoid valves see Chapter 9 Optional Equipment Gas Concentraton Status Bar Icons SEMPLE ROME CHS MTC pH bed Programmable Soft Key Labels Main Menu The Main Menu contains a number of submenus Instrument parameters and settings can be read and modified within the submenus according to their function The concentration readings appear above the Main Menu and submenus in every screen The Service menu is visible only when the instrument is in service mode For more information on the service mode see Service Mode later in this chapter Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 7 Operation Range Menu e Use f Jand Y to move the cursor up and down e Press to make a selection e Press to return to the Main Menu or to return to the Run screen EH DHOBM Range Menu The Range menu allows the operator to select the gas units standard ranges and to set the custom ranges e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Concentration Units The Concentration Units screen defines how the THC concentration is expressed Gas units of parts per billion ppb parts per million ppm parts per million carbon ppmc micrograms per cubic meter ug m milligrams per cubic meter mg m or percent are available It should be understood that the concentration unit is only a label Therefore the instrument operates independentl
243. ple reports that the current detector base temperature is 199 5 C Send base temp Receive base temp 199 5 deg C filter temp This command reports the current sample filter temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current filter temperature is 199 8 G Send filter temp Receive filter temp 199 8 deg C flame temp This command reports the current FID flame temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the current flame temperature is 221 0 E Send flame temp Receive flame temp 221 0 deg C Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alarms C Link Protocol Commands Alarms frequency This command reports the average raw FID signal in Hz The following example reports that the frequency is 56749 Hz Send frequency Receive frequency 56749 Hz internal temp This command reports the current internal instrument temperature The following example reports that the internal temperature is 27 2 C Send internal temp Receive internal temp 027 2 deg C oven temp This command reports the setpoint for the detector oven temperature in degrees C The following example reports that the detector oven temperature is 200 0 C Send oven temp Receive oven temp 200 0 deg C pump temp This command reports the pump temperature in degrees C only in the Model 51 HT The following example reports that the pump temperature is 200 0 C Send pump temp Receive pum
244. plug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Disconnect the ribbon cable and the two wire connector from the front panel board 3 Remove the four screws at the corners of the LCD module 4 Slide the LCD module out towards the center of the instrument 5 Replace the LCD module by following the previous steps in reverse Note The optimal contrast will change from one LCD screen to another After replacing the LCD screen the contrast may need to be reset If the content on the screen is visible select Instrument Controls Screen Contrast and adjust the screen contrast If the content on the screen is not visible use the set contrast 10 C Link command to set screen constrast to mid range then optimize the contrast See the C Link Protocol Commands appendix for more information on this command A For additional assistance Thermo Fisher Scientific has service available from exclusive distributors worldwide Contact one of the phone numbers below for product support and technical information 866 282 0430 Toll Free 508 520 0430 International Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 8 System Description This chapter describes the function and location of the system components provides an overview of the firmware structure and includes a description of the system electronics and input output connections and functions as follows Hardware on page 8 1 Firmware on page 8 5 Electronics on page 8 6 I O Components
245. power up in the remote locked mode changes can not be made from the front panel The following example sets the instrument to power up in remote locked mode Send set power up mode 1 Receive set power up mode 1 ok Table B 12 Power up Mode Values Value Power up Mode 0 Local Unlocked Mode default 1 Remote Locked Mode program no This command reports the analyzer s model information and program version number Send program no Receive program no iSeries 51iLT 01 00 01 074 set layout ack This command disables the stale layout layout change indicator that is attached to each response if the erec layout has changed since the last time erec layout was requested according to Table B 13 Send set layout ack Receive set layout ack ok Table B 13 Set Layout Ack Values Value Function 0 Do nothing default 1 Append Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual B 43 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration 1 0 Configuration B 44 Model 51i Instruction Manual tz This command reports the tz timezone string for the NTP server See Network Time Protocol Server in the Communications Settings section of the Operation chapter for more information Send tz Receive tz EST 5EDT set tz string This command sets the timezone string for the instrument for use with the NTP server where string is a standard timezone string Common strings are listed in the Timezone screen descript
246. ppropriate ultrasonic bath provided it is sufficiently rinsed and dried before it is installed in the instrument Otherwise the filter should be replaced See Chapter 7 Servicing Install the cleaned filter element back into the base Note Be sure to install the filter element with the open end of the cup facing down into the base and that it is seated flat A Wrap the filter housing threads with Teflon tape then replace the cap nut and tighten with the wrench If Teflon tape is not used the cap nut may become difficult to remove Re install the oven cover and the instrument cover Thermo Fisher Scientific Preventive Maintenance Internal Sample Filter Cleaning Figure 5 2 Cleaning the Internal Filter Element Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 5 5 Safety Precautions Firmware Diagnostic Information Thermo Fisher Scientific Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This instrument has been designed to achieve a high level of reliability In the event of problems or failure the troubleshooting guidelines board level connection diagrams connector pin descriptions and testing procedures presented in this chapter should be helpful in isolating and identifying problems For additional fault location information refer to the Preventive Maintenance chapter in this manual The service mode described in the Operation chapter includes parameters and functions that are useful when making adjustme
247. r the Model 51 HT only Figure 7 8 provided by KNF During normal use the diaphragm and valve plate are the only parts of the pump that need to be replaced 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the pump assembly from the analyzer as described in Pump Replacement 3 For ease of re assembly mark the relative positions of the head plate A intermediate plate B and the spacer ring C with a line using the pencil or Sharpie type marker 4 Undo the 4 head nuts and flat washers D and the 6 cup washers L from the studs and lift off the head plate A valve plate E and intermediate plate B 5 If necessary lightly clean the valve seat area of the head plate A and intermediate plate B of any deposits with fine steel wool 6 Unscrew the clamping disk G by inserting needle nose pliers into the two holes and turning it counter clockwise Remove the clamping disk the two diaphragms H the connecting rod disk and any shim disks P present on top of the hex piece Be sure to note the number and position of the shims so that they can be replaced correctly when you re assemble the pump 7 Turn the counterweight or the motor fan by hand until the connecting rod K is at mid stroke and centered and place the shim disk or disks P on top of the hex piece Place the connecting rod disk in its cavity in the spacer ring place two new diaphragms H over the spacer ring
248. r Supply Replacement on page 7 28 e Analog Output Testing on page 7 29 Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 1 Servicing Service Locations e Analog Output Calibration on page 7 31 e Analog Input Calibration on page 7 32 e Thermistor Replacement on page 7 34 e Ambient Temperature Calibration on page 7 34 e Pressure Controller Replacement on page 7 36 e Pressure Regulator Replacement on page 7 37 e Hydrogen Zero Span Solenoid Valve Replacement on page 7 39 e Testing and Replacing the Ignitor on page 7 39 e Checking the Detector Bias Voltage on page 7 41 e Removing the Detector on page 7 42 e Detector Rebuilding on page 7 44 e Internal Sample Filter Replacement on page 7 49 e General Electrical Testing on page 7 50 e Adjusting Critical Gas Flows on page 7 53 e Fuse Replacement on page 7 57 e I O Expansion Board Optional Replacement on page 7 57 e Digital Output Board Replacement on page 7 59 e Motherboard Replacement on page 7 60 e Measurement Interface Board Replacement on page 7 61 e Front Panel Board Replacement on page 7 62 e LCD Module Replacement on page 7 63 e Service Locations on page 7 64 7 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Safety Precautions Thermo Fisher Scientific A A Servicing Safety Precautions Read the safety precautions before beginning any procedures in this chapter WARNING The service procedures in this
249. r continuity between the BNC center socket and the tip of the plunger The reading should indicate continuity The FID detector can be removed from the instrument as a single unit It might be easier to service after removing the whole detector and in some circumstances it is necessary see Figure 7 18 Use the following procedure to remove the detector Equipment Required Philips screwdriver Hex wrench set Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Removing the Detector Wrench open end 5 16 inch Wrench open end 7 16 inch Wrench open end 9 16 inch Wrench open end 1 2 inch CAUTION Avoid contact with the heated oven components Allow the oven to cool to room temperature before handling oven components A small fan directed into the oven will speed cooling A Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover 2 Remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool 3 Shut off all support gases 4 Loosen the two screws on the flame thermocouple retainer located on the top of the detector and pull the flame sensor out of the detector Note Gently rock the sensor if needed to dislodge the o ring seal A 5 Disconnect the BNC coax signal connection to the signal pogo 6 Di
250. r not calibrated or calibrated improperly Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides Action Check flow rate at the sample bulkhead If low flow rebuild pump head Use input board test mode and verify signal on each range to isolate fault to either FID or input board Replace faulty component If problem still exists check signal cables and replace measurement interface board Check that the calibration factors are within their proper limits Zero or Span will not stabilize Flow rate of the calibration gas is inadequate or too high Instrument is not drawing in span gas Averaging time is not set correctly Check bypass or atmospheric pressure vent to verify that the zero air system is providing more flow than the instrument is drawing but not pressurizing the inlet Check pressure readings on the Diagnostics screen Check the averaging time in Main Menu If too high the unit will be slow to stabilize If too low the signal may appear noisy Calibration Drift Line voltage fluctuations Unstable span source Back pressure sample control has failed Check to see if line voltage is within specifications Replace source gases Check pressure on Diagnostic screen Excessive Noise Defective input board or BNC connection Noise pick up by recorder or data logger Identify defective component and replace Check analog output cable shielding and grounding Try to localize so
251. r the past second and the analog inputs are averaged over that second The high level processor polls the low level processors once per second to exchange the measurement and control data Signals are gathered from the low level processors once per second and then processed by the high level processor to produce the final Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 5 System Description Electronics measurement values The one second accumulated counts representing the THC concentrations are accumulated and reported for the user specified averaging time If this averaging time is greater than ten seconds the measurement is still reported every 10 seconds The one second average of the other analog inputs such as oven temperature are reported directly no additional signal conditioning is performed by the high level processor Output Communication The front panel display serial and Ethernet data ports and analog outputs are the means of communicating the results of the above calculations The front panel display presents the THC concentrations The display is updated every 1 10 seconds depending on the averaging time The analog output ranges are user selectable via the firmware The analog outputs are defaulted based on the measurement range Negative concentrations can be represented as long as they are within 5 of full scale The zero and full scale values may be set by the user to any desired value Electronics All electronics operate from
252. r will do it automatically when a fuel pressure is selected The Set Pressures screen shows the current set point for each gas Once one of the pressures is selected for adjustment the Target Flow Set Pressure screen is displayed At this point a 0 500 cc min flow meter should be connected to the exhaust bulkhead on the rear panel Caution the fittings are hot The analyzer cannot measure the flow rate but this screen displays a target flow that should be achieved by adjusting the set pressure Note that the analyzer temporarily shuts off the pump unless the sample run or ignite pressure is being adjusted so that the flow rates can be measured correctly Once target flow have been achieved for the sample air and fuel refer to Optimizing the Gas Flows in the Servicing chapter WARNING Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A Note This adjustment should only be performed by an instrument service technician A Note The Model 51 must be stabilized at the set temperature in order for the gas flows to be set properly A e Inthe Main Menu choose Service Set Pressure and Flow 3 72 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Service Menu EDEIZE piti Py tit HE bet Pria ii ci i d The following example sets the AIR RUN target flow and set pressure adjustment I5RHZE CH T5 ELEM Hwli pi bo bet BPs ETE CIL i ROSGLGU i iNi i Input Board Calibrati
253. ral Electrical Testing 7 50 Model 51i Instruction Manual Turn the instrument OFF unplug the power cord and remove the cover Use the Philips head screwdriver to loosen the eight thumb screws if necessary and remove the oven cover and allow the internal components to cool Using the 1 inch wrench remove the filter assembly cap nut see Figure 5 2 Note This nut may be difficult to move Be careful not to bend any of the 1 8 inch tubing attached to the filter assembly while undoing the cap nut A Remove the old filter element and gasket from the assembly base and gently dislodge the element from the base with a screwdriver if necessary Using a clean air supply or other clean compressed gas blow any dust or particles out of the base Install the new filter element and gasket into the base Note Be sure to install the filter element with the open end of the cup facing down into the base and that it is seated flat A Wrap the filter housing threads with Teflon tape then replace the cap nut and tighten with the wrench If Teflon tape is not used the cap nut may become difficult to remove Re install the oven cover and the instrument cover This section provides the equipment requirements and instructions for testing the instrument heating system and temperature sensors Equipment Required Electrical temperature gauge type K thermocouple Multimeter Philips screwdriver Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fis
254. reen allows the user to assign one of the concentrations to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings gt Select Content gt select Field gt Concentrations 3 26 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu a ejes kgs Bae d ES ti Lco pH Eis ivi Prid Y Other Measurements The Other Measurements screen allows the user to assign one of the other available measurement types to the selected record field The selected item is shown by lt after it Pump temperature is only available in the HT Model Note that at this point pressing indicates that these are proposed changes as opposed to implemented changes To change the selected record format and erase record log file data see Commit Content below e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings Select Content select Field Other Measurements EERE S D g PTDENZC DH OTE Pei Ei TH Analog Inputs The Analog Inputs screen allows the user to assign an analog input signal none or analog inputs 1 8 to the selected record field The selected item is shown by
255. resses Verify the coil number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the coil number on the instrument A Note Coil status 1 indicates active state A Table C 1 Read Coils for 51 Coil Number Status 0 INVALID 1 LOCAL REMOTE 2 SERVICE 3 ZERO MODE 4 SPAN MODE 5 SAMPLE MODE Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported Coil Number Status 6 PURGE MODE 7 IDLE MODE 8 GEN ALARM 9 CONC ALARM 10 CONC MAX ALARM 11 CONC MIN ALARM 12 INTERNAL TEMP ALARM 13 DETECTOR TEMP ALARM 14 FILTER TEMP ALARM 15 PUMP TEMP ALARM 16 FLAME TEMP ALARM 17 AIR PRESSURE ALARM 18 SAMPLE PRESSURE ALARM 19 FUEL PRESSURE ALARM 20 FLAME OUT ALARM 21 SIGNAL STRENGTH ALARM 22 OVER RANGE ALARM 23 HEATER FAIL ALARM 24 SENSOR FAIL ALARM 25 ZERO NOISE ALARM 26 SPAN NOISE ALARM 27 ZERO CHECK CAL ALARM 28 SPAN CHECK CAL ALARM 29 BIAS VOLTAGE ALARM 30 INTERFACE BD STATUS ALARM 31 1 0 EXP BD STATUS ALARM 32 EXTERNAL CONVERTER BD STATUS IMPORTANT NOTE The addresses in the following tables are Protocol Data Unit PDU addresses Verify the register number on your MODBUS master to ensure that it matches the register number on the instrument amp Model 51i Instruction Manual C 9 MODBUS Protocol MODBUS Parameters Supported C 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual Note For additional in
256. rface Board La HAY Y BA Th SS Power Supply Transformer Pump Motherboard 100 and 220 V option only i 08 Air Bulkhead Fuel Solenoid Zero Span Solenoids optional Fan 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Figure 7 2 Model 51 Component Layout High Temperature 7 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing External Device Connection Components Flame lonization Sample Pressure Detector FID Regulator Sample Filter Input Board Air Bulkhead Electronic Pressure Fuel Solenoid Controls Zero Span Solenoids optional Thermistor Fan Measurement Interface Board S UTER um CREER Ind 1 0 Expansion Board Opt Digital Output Board Power Supply Transformer Pump Motherboard 100 and 220 V option only Figure 7 3 Model 51 Component Layout Low Temperature Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 9 Servicing Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel Removing the The measurement case assembly can be removed and the partition panel Measurement Case be lowered to improve access to connectors and components Refer to the following steps when a procedure requires lowering the partition panel Assembly and Lowering gu 7 4 the Partition Panel REMOVE SCREWS SLIDE CASE ASSEMBLY OUT Pass Thr
257. rial port The standard bi directional serial interface can be configured for either RS 232 or RS 485 The serial baud rate is user selectable in the firmware for standard speeds from 1200 to 115200 baud The user can also set the data bits parity and stop bits The following protocols are supported e C Link e Modbus Slave e Geysitech Bayern Hessen e Streaming Data The Streaming Data protocol transmits user selected measurement data via the serial port in real time for capture by a serial printer datalogger or PC A null modem crossed cable is required when connecting the analyzer to an IBM compatible PC However a straight cable one to one may be required when connecting the analyzer to other remote devices As a general rule when the connector of the host remote device is female a straight cable is required and when the connector is male a null modem cable is required Data Format 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 BAUD 7 or 8 data bits 1 or 2 stop bits No odd or even parity All responses are terminated with a carriage return hex 0D Refer to Table 8 1 for the DB9 connector pin configuration Table 8 1 RS 232 DB9 Connector Pin Configuration DB9 Pin Function 2 RX 3 TX 7 RTS 8 CTS 5 Ground Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 11 System Description 1 0 Components RS 485 Connection The instrument uses a four wire RS 485 configuration with automatic flow control SD Re
258. rrat id 3 68 oec M 3 69 Min and Max Concentration LImitszi la 3 69 Min errada ista toldo Uo eiusd ie tuaeque 3 69 Service MEU des em tub divas reat eases ieia 3 70 Manual Fuel Valve Bypass titi 3 70 Bypass Flame Detection 1 era ed dated ees 3 71 Instrument Idle Mode 253 00e trie pri oa 3 71 viii Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Contents Det Pressure and Pro Witt piscis 3 71 Input Board Calibration eiie pin tr heces donis 3 73 Manual Input Calibration su iere tib re ic 3 73 Automatic Input Calibration iicet iet et edes 3 74 Input Brequency display eu ed ed fette etm mines 3 75 Temperature Calibration he dois ae ree Ge d rer b edes 3 75 Analog Output Calibration tts o sac bite oda i uke utiedaod 3 76 Analog Output Calibrate Zero sii 3 76 Analog Output Calibrate Full Scale sss 3 77 Analog Input Callbration oon teer rete ei cen aedes aun 3 77 Analog Input Calibrate Zero ud eias et caida 3 78 Analog Input Calibrate Full Scale 45 26 eofdem 3 78 Display Pixel Test sic ir Gee tartans eee ead 3 78 Restore User Defaults a ae d detect dente ts 3 79 Password Md 3 79 Idtm MC 3 79 Lock Instf melltu euet ii 3 80 Lock Unlock and Local Remote Operation 3 80 Change Pass ward patas o dno td tote ut 3 80 Remove Passwort uaa imu id 3 81 Unlock Instinto utere teta Proms Rue a doce rra ocv ao taria 3 81 Chapter 4 Calibration s
259. rs on page C 2 e Application Data Unit Definition on page C 2 e Function Codes on page C 3 e MODBUS Parameters Supported on page C 8 Additional information on the MODBUS protocol can be obtained at http www modbus org References are from MODBUS Application Protocol Specification V1 1a MODBUS IDA June 4 2004 The following are the communication parameters that are used to configure the serial port of the iSeries to support MODBUS RTU protocol Number of Data bits 7 or 8 Number of Stop bits lor2 Parity None Odd or Even Data rate 1200 to 115200 Baud 9600 is default Model 51i Instruction Manual C 1 MODBUS Protocol TCP Communication Parameters TCP Communication Parameters Application Data Unit Definition Slave Address MBAP Header C 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual iSeries instruments support the MODBUS TCP protocol The register definition is the same as for the serial interface Up to three simultaneous connections are supported over Ethernet TCP connection port for MODBUS 502 Here are the MODBUS ADU Application Data Unit formats over serial and TCP IP Serial Slave Address Function Code Data Error Check TCP IP MBAP Header Function Code Data The MODBUS slave address is a single byte in length This is the same as the instrument ID used for C Link commands and can be between 1 and 127 decimal i e 0x01 hex to Ox7F hex This address is only
260. rt of Menu Driven Firmware sss 3 5 Figure 3 4 Pin Out of Rear Panel Connector sss 3 10 Figure 4 1 Internal Zero Span Valve Schematic sssss 4 6 Figure 5 1 Inspecting and Cleaning the Fan Filters sss 5 3 Figure 5 2 Cleaning the Internal Filter Element oo cece eeteee 5 5 Figure 6 1 Board Level Connection Diagram Common Electronics 6 8 Figure 6 2 Board Level Connection Diagram Measurement System 6 9 Figure 7 1 Properly Grounded Antistatic Wrist Strap ocooo ioo 7 4 Figure 7 2 Model 517 Component Layout High Temperature 7 8 Figure 7 3 Model 51 Component Layout Low Temperature 7 9 Figure 7 4 Removing the Measurement Case Assembly and Lowering the Partition Panel High Temperature shown 7 10 Figure 7 5 Replacing the Pump High Temperature 1 13 Figure 7 6 Replacing the Pump Low Temperature 1 13 Figure 7 7 Rebuilding the Pump New Technology Heated Head Version 7 16 Figure 7 8 Rebuilding the Pump Heated Head Version 1 19 Figure 7 9 Rebuilding the Pump New Technology Low Temp Version 7 22 Figure 7 10 Rebuilding the Pump Low Temp Version 1 24 Figure 7 11 Replacing the Fan 1 25 Figure
261. rument s Main Menu contains two sub menus that are directly related to calibration The first titled Calibration Factors provides direct access to the zero offset and span coefficients that the firmware uses to convert the raw detector signal to a concentration value These parameters may be viewed adjusted or reset to default values through this menu The ability to view and manually adjust these parameters may be useful for troubleshooting However the commands available in this menu generally should not be utilized during routine calibration and operation The second sub menu titled Calibration provides access to the controls that are used for routine calibration including microprocessor based adjustments to the zero and span The Calibration menu also provides access to a sub menu called Zero Span Check which provides a system for programming the analyzer to perform automatic calibration checks and or adjustments Note The manual calibration procedure described here assumes that the calibration gases will be introduced through the analyzer s SAMPLE port If the internal ZERO and SPAN valves are being used be sure to open the appropriate valve using the _ _ pushbutton as indicated on the analyzer screen If the internal zero and span valves are installed but are not being used at this time DO NOT switch the instrument to zero or span mode since that will open the internal valves and allow ambient air to leak
262. s 1 Byte 1 Byte 0x03 or 0x04 0x0000 to maximum allowed by instrument 1 to maximum allowed by instrument 0x03 or 0x04 2xN N N or N 1 Function code 0x80 01 IIlegal Function 02 Illegal Address 03 Illegal Data 04 Slave Device Failure Here is an example of a request and response to read registers 10 13 Request Field Name Function Starting Address Hi Starting Address Lo No of Registers Hi No of Registers Lo Response Field Name Function Byte Count Register Value Hi 10 Register Value Lo 10 Register Value Hi 11 Register Value Lo 11 Hex 0x03 0x00 0x09 0x00 0x04 Hex 0x03 0x06 0x02 0x2B 0x00 0x00 Thermo Fisher Scientific 0x05 Force Write Thermo Fisher Scientific Single Coil MODBUS Protocol Function Codes Register Value Hi 12 0x00 Register Value Lo 12 0x64 Register Value Hi 13 0x00 Register Value Lo 13 0x64 The contents of register 10 are shown as the two byte values of 0x02 0x2B Then contents of registers 11 13 are 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x64 and 0x00 0x64 respectively The Force Write Single Coil function simulates the activation of the digital inputs in the instrument which triggers the respective action This function code is used to set a single action to either ON or OFF The request specifies the address of the action to be forced Actions are addressed starting at zero Therefore action number 1 is addressed as 0 The requested ON OFF state
263. s Fuel Pressure Min and Max Fuel Pressure Limits 3 64 Model 51 Instruction Manual The Minimum Sample Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum sample pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum sample pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Sample Pressure gt Min or Max ip pieri ML e EA The Fuel Pressure screen displays the current fuel pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 to 50 psi If the fuel pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Fuel Pressure The Minimum Fuel Pressure alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum fuel pressure alarm limit The minimum and maximum fuel pressure screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms Fuel Pressure Min or Max Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu Air Pressure The Air Pressure screen displays the current air pressure reading and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 0 0 to 50 0 psi If the air pressure reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu cho
264. s 3 55 FID cci uM EY 3 56 Flame Out Power Up Information eode oec en attt 3 56 Analog Input Readings uu eios he ep tien eee tete 3 56 Analog Input Voltage ori 3 57 Digital puts ns rindo 3 57 Relay Stat OS 3 57 Test Analog Q tp ts atate ettet o NO 3 58 S t Analog Outputs iS D Rte esie edendo 3 58 Instrument Configuration ina 3 59 Contact toman o 3 59 Plating Menu arenisca ti it 3 59 Internal Perm perat test o od adela 3 60 Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits 3 61 Detector L emperature tii is oasis 3 61 Min and Max Detector Temperature Limits s 3 61 Filter Temperature uode tanen iieii si 3 62 Min and Max Filter Temperature Limits cedet 3 62 Pump Letaperatites psa rt bii ee adus 3 62 Min and Max Pump Temperature Limits eerte ene teint 3 63 Sample Pressure A utente etie urne enc Ea Sen cee a ate 3 63 Min and Max Sample Pressure Limits ese 3 64 Fuel Ir RTT RED T T 3 64 Min and Max Fuel Pressure Limits iet 3 64 Air Pies SUP ed condado a 3 65 Min and Max Air Pressure Li oid dn eet ets 3 65 lI A E a A 3 65 Min and Max Bias Voltage Limits coi is 3 66 Signal Strength svenni ienna is 3 66 Min and Max Signal Strength Limits cias rosids naciones 3 66 VANO S E Mm 3 67 Min and Max Zero Noise LIts d Gnesi theca danh ds 3 67 Zero and Span Check iced eee d c bun 3 67 Max Zero and Span Check Offset 2 nitet 3 68 Zero and Span Auto Calibration se
265. s all of the pollutants of the original sample Depending on the application the bypass could be flammable explosive or highly toxic If the sample stream is potentially hazardous the bypass should be routed back to the source or to an appropriate vent A Model 51i Instruction Manual 2 5 Installation Connecting Support Gases Venting the FID Exhaust If the analyzer is running in an open rack or an area with normal ventilation the FID exhaust can be left open and does not need to be vented This is the preferred configuration However if the analyzer must be mounted in a small enclosure without ventilation the FID exhaust port should be connected to a vent line that runs to an exhaust system This is so hydrogen cannot accumulate and create an explosion hazard in the event of a failure If an exhaust line is used the operator should be aware that it may make flame ignition more difficult Use of a large diameter line may be helpful if this becomes a problem Gas exiting the detector vent contains water vapor formed by hydrogen combustion Any exit line connected to the detector vent must be slanted down to prevent condensed water from collecting in the tubing WARNING During normal operation the FID exhaust contains non flammable components mostly air and water vapor However under failure conditions the FID exhaust could contain explosive levels of hydrogen A CAUTION Gas fittings on the rear panel or inside the oven are very
266. s ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in minor to moderate personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in property damage if the warning is ignored A Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts in this Manual Alert f WARNING Description The bypass or sample gas exhaust contains all of the pollutants of the original sample Depending on the application the bypass could be flammable explosive or highly toxic If the sample stream is potentially hazardous the bypass should be routed back to the source or to an appropriate vent A During normal operation the FID exhaust contains non flammable components mostly air and water vapor However under failure conditions the FID exhaust could contain explosive levels of hydrogen A Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Alert CAUTION Equipment Damage About This Manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Description The Model 51 is supplied with a three wire grounded power cord Under no circumstances should this grounding system be defeated 4 Pressures are set at the factory and should not be arbitrarily changed A The service procedures in this manual are restricted to qualified service personnel only A If the equipment is operated in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired A Gas fittings on the rear panel or inside the oven
267. s in the sample stream using the energy of a hydrogen flame The hydrogen flame oxidizes organic compounds to generate carbon dioxide and water In the process ions are formed in an electrical field that is generated between a polarized jet where the hydrogen flame burns and a cylindrical collector electrode which surrounds the jet as shown in Figure 1 1 The sample gas is mixed with the hydrogen inside the FID at the base of the jet An external source of air provides the necessary oxygen for the combustion of fuel at the jet To Electrometer e Collector Electrode A 4 Flame 4 Jet 300V 7 Z 4 q Diffuser m Sample Support Air gt S Fuel 1 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual Figure 1 1 Model 51 FID Schematic Thermo Fisher Scientific Operating Principle of the Sampling and Flow Controls Thermo Fisher Scientific Introduction Operating Principle of the Sampling and Flow Controls Due to the voltage difference between the jet and collector negatively charged ions formed in the flame migrate to the collector When the ions arrive at the collector a small ion current is created This current which can be as small as 1x10 amps is proportional to the concentration of carbon atoms in the sample Unlike some other ionization detectors the FID responds to almost all organic compounds including methane Because the signal is produced primarily by the
268. sconnect the BNC bias cable from the bias pogo 7 Disconnect the ignitor power cable pink connector located outside the oven 8 Using the 9 16 inch wrench disconnect the exhaust vent line from the top of the detector Note The stainless steel vent tube can be gently flexed if necessary to remove it from the fitting A Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 43 Servicing Detector Rebuilding 9 Pull the ignitor power cable and spare ignitor power cable through the grommet on the side wall of the oven 10 Using an Allen wrench remove the four screws holding the upper detector base to the lower detector base 11 Disconnect the ignitor grounding wire from the detector base 12 Lift the detector assembly straight up about 1 4 inch and slide it off to the side 13 Continue with the rebuild procedure in this chapter 14 Once the detector unit is re assembled it can be re installed using the previous steps in reverse Hame Thermocouple Ignitor Spare Ignitor Signal Pogo Upper Detector Base Mounting Screws 4 Bias Pogo Figure 7 18 Removing the Detector Detector This section provides the equipment and instructions for rebuilding the Rebuil ding detector assembly as shown in Figure 7 19 A part number and drawing reference for the detector assembly is provided in Table 7 6 It is necessary to remove the detector from the instrument as a complete unit before service Refer to the Removing the Detector procedure
269. scription of the C Link protocol commands that can be used to remotely control an analyzer using a host device such as a PC or datalogger Model 51 Instruction Manual i About This Manual Safety Safety Safety and Equipment Damage Alerts Model 517 Instruction Manual e Appendix C MODBUS Protocol provides a description of the MODBUS Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 RTU protocol as well as TCP IP over Ethernet e Appendix D Geysitech Bayern Hessen Protocol provides a description of the Geysitech Bayern Hessen or BH Protocol Interface and is supported both over RS 232 485 as well as TCP IP over Ethernet Review the following safety information carefully before using the analyzer This manual provides specific information on how to operate the analyzer however if the analyzer is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This manual contains important information to alert you to potential safety hazards and risks of equipment damage Refer to the following types of alerts you may see in this manual Safety and Equipment Damage Alert Descriptions Alert DANGER WARNING CAUTION Equipment Damage PEE gt Description A hazard is present that could result in death or serious personal injury if the warning is ignored A A hazard or unsafe practice could result in serious personal injury if the warning i
270. se alarm minimum value is 001 Send alarm span noise min Receive alarm span noise min 0 001 set alarm span noise min value set alarm span noise max value These commands set the span noise alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the span noise alarm limits The following example sets the span noise alarm maximum value to 100 Send set alarm span noise max 100 Receive set alarm span noise max 100 ok alarm trig conc This command reports the current THC concentration alarm trigger action for the minimum alarm to either floor or ceiling The following example shows the THC concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling according at Table B 4 Send alarm trig conc Receive alarm trig conc 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific Diagnostics Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Diagnostics set alarm trig conc value This command sets the THC concentration alarm minimum value where value is set to either floor or ceiling according to Table B 4 The following example sets the THC concentration minimum alarm trigger to ceiling Send set alarm trig conc 1 Receive set alarm trig conc 1 ok Table B 4 Alarm Trigger Values Value Alarm Trigger 00 Floor 01 Ceiling alarm zero noise min alarm zero noise max These commands report the current zero noise alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the zero noise alarm minim
271. se Diagnostics Program Versions PPP PLES E Lii i DH gpp Voltages The Voltages menu displays the current diagnostic voltage readings This screen enables the power supply to be quickly read for low or fluctuating voltages without having to use a voltage meter The I O board item is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages PPP L a Evi ELE rM mt Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 53 Operation Diagnostics Menu Motherboard Voltages The Motherboard screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the motherboard e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages Motherboard Py Tae DH DEh Labi A i Interface Board Voltages The Interface Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Voltages Interface Board o PILROPUHPMPO 1 0 Board Voltages The I O Board screen read only is used to display the voltage readings on the I O expansion board This menu is only displayed if the I O expansion board option is installed e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt Voltages gt I O Board ip priori Pil PFiLoribebd 3 54 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Diagnostics Menu Temperatures The Temperatures screen read only displays the detec
272. se varies depending on the specific compound being sampled Therefore if the instrument is calibrated with propane the ppm readings displayed on the front panel will not be the same as if the instrument were calibrated with methane As described in the previous section the instrument is normally calibrated with a gas mixture containing methane or propane in air The span gas concentration should be similar to the concentration expected in the actual sample As a general rule of thumb a span concentration that is about 8096 of the maximum expected in the sample will provide good results The instrument is expected to maintain accuracy that is within 2 of the span value when sample concentrations range from 10 to 12096 of the span concentration Readings taken outside that range are usually still accurate but might be considered suspect until confirmed by a re calibration within that range or by checking against a known standard Span gases are available in a wide range of concentrations However to maintain good span gas stability the cylinder concentration should generally be above 1 0 ppm If calibration with lower concentrations is required dilution is advised The possibility of stability problems at extremely low concentrations should also be discussed with the gas supplier The signal generated by an FID is dependent on both the hydrocarbon concentration and on the type of hydrocarbon being sampled For simple hydrocarbons the s
273. sible only if the zero span check or auto calibration options are enabled Flame Out THC Overrange Heater Fail Temperature Sensor Fail and Ignitor Check are display only The Motherboard Status Interface Status and I O Expansion Status if che I O expansion board is installed indicate that the power supplies are working and the connections are successful There are no setting screens for these alarms If any alarms are active the alarm bell icon is displayed on the right side of the status bar e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms DH HIM MAPA Internal Temperature The Internal Temperature screen displays the current internal temperature 3 60 Model 51 Instruction Manual and sets the minimum and maximum alarm limits Acceptable alarm limits range from 8 to 47 C If the internal temperature reading goes beyond either the minimum or maximum limit an alarm is activated and the alarm bell icon appears in the status bar on the Run screen and in the Main Menu e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms gt Internal Temp Thermo Fisher Scientific Min and Max Internal Temperature Limits Detector Temperature Min and Max Detector Temperature Limits Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Alarms Menu The Minimum Internal Temperature alarm limit screen is used to change the minimum internal temperature alarm limit The minimum and maximum internal temperature screens function the same way e Inthe Main Menu choose Alarms
274. signal intensity produced by the zero and or span gas and the other diagnostic information The possible calibration types include zero adjust span adjust manual calibration and automatic calibration For detailed calibration procedures and reports refer to Chapter 4 Calibration Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 15 Operation Calibration Menu Note If a calibration fails or produces a fault condition it is noted in the Calibration History and the unit will continue to operate using the last valid calibration A e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Calibration History Zero Span Check The Zero Span Check menu is available only if the zero span valve option is installed It is used to program the instrument to perform fully automated zero and span checks or adjustments e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check 3 16 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Next Time Operation Calibration Menu The Next Time screen is used to view and set the initial date and time 24 hour format of the zero span check Once the initial zero span check is performed the date and time of the next zero span check is calculated and displayed e Inthe Main Menu choose Calibration gt Zero Span Check gt Next Time Period Hours Total Duration Hour Thermo Fisher Scientific Zero Span Purge Duration Minutes The Period Hours screen defines the period or interval between zero span che
275. sing gas mixtures that are similar to the unknown sample being measured and should be conducted under conditions that are similar to the actual operating conditions The FID or flame ionization detector used in the Model 51 is linear over the instrument s entire measurement range Therefore the instrument can be calibrated using a simple two point procedure First the sample inlet is flooded with hydrocarbon free zero air and the detector s background or zero signal is recorded Then the inlet is flooded with span gas containing a known concentration of hydrocarbons and the detector signal is again recorded A calibration factor can then be calculated based on the FID s response to zero air and to a known concentration of hydrocarbons When the instrument is switched to the normal Run mode the calibration factor is used to convert FID signal strength back into a hydrocarbon concentration for display on the front panel The following sections discuss the calibration process and procedures for calibrating the instrument Model 51i Instruction Manual 4 1 Calibration Frequency of Calibration Frequency of Calibration Selecting Calibration Gases Zero Gas 4 2 Model 51 Instruction Manual e Frequency of Calibration on page 4 2 e Selecting Calibration Gases on page 4 2 e Connecting Calibration Gases on page 4 5 e Calibration Menus on page 4 7 e Manual Calibration Procedure on page 4 7 Each in
276. span concentration does not match the concentration you are using edit the value as needed 4 Press to open the span valve or introduce span gas through the sample port 5 Allow the instrument to stabilize for at least 5 minutes or until the reading does not appear to be changing 6 Press and the processor will automatically adjust the span coefficient to give the instrument reading that was entered in Step 3 7 Press W to return to the Calibration menu In addition to the calibration procedures described above the Model 51 can also be programmed to either check or adjust the analyzer calibration on a routine basis However to implement this function the internal calibration valves must be in use or the external zero and span gas supply system must be capable of turning the gas flows on and off by a signal from the analyzer s I O system For additional information about automated zero and span checks refer to Zero Span Check on page 3 16 Model 51i Instruction Manual 4 9 Chapter 5 Preventive Maintenance This chapter describes the periodic maintenance procedures that should be performed on the instrument to ensure proper operation Since usage and environmental conditions vary greatly the components should be inspected frequently until an appropriate maintenance schedule is determined This chapter includes the following preventive maintenance information e Safety Precautions on page 5 1 e Cleaning t
277. ssive tension on the cables Re install the measurement case assembly by following the previous steps in reverse Use the following procedure to replace the pump Figure 7 5 and Figure 7 6 Equipment Required 120 V pump Wrench 7 16 inch 2 required Teflon tape 1 4 inch Philips screwdriver Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 11 Servicing Pump Replacement 7 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual Equipment Damage Some internal components can be damaged by small amounts of static electricity A properly grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn while handling any internal component A 1 Allow the detector oven to cool to room temperature Disconnect the pump power cable from the measurement interface board 2 Remove the detector oven cover 3 Remove the heater and temperature sensor HT only 4 Remove both the inlet and exhaust line from the pump and remove the pump and mounting bracket from the measurement case assembly 5 Remove the two connectors from the pump tabs 6 Remove the pump from its mounting bracket 7 Remove the inlet and exhaust fitting from the pump head 8 Remove the remaining Teflon tape from fitting threads 9 Install the new pump by following the previous steps in reverse Thermo Fisher Scientific Servicing Pump Rebuilding Heated Head Version Pump Bracket Mounting Screws 4 Heater Cartridge Temperature Sensor Exhaust Pump Mounting Screws 4 back side of bracket
278. stallation Installation of the Model 51 includes lifting the instrument unpacking and inspection connecting sample zero span and exhaust lines and attaching the analog and or digital outputs to a recording device The installation should always be followed by instrument calibration as described in the Calibration chapter of this manual This chapter provides the following recommendations and procedures for installing the instrument e Lifting on page 2 1 e Unpacking and Inspection on page 2 1 e Connecting Support Gases on page 2 2 e Connecting External Devices on page 2 7 e Startup on page 2 12 When lifting the instrument use a procedure appropriate to lifting a heavy object such as bending at the knees while keeping your back straight and upright Grasp the instrument at the bottom in the front and at the rear of the unit Although one person can lift the unit it is desirable to have two persons lifting one by grasping the bottom in the front and the other by grasping the bottom in the rear Equipment Damage Do not attempt to lift the instrument by the cover or other external fittings A The Model 51i is shipped complete in one container If there is obvious damage to the shipping container when the instrument is received notify the carrier immediately and hold for inspection The carrier is responsible for any damage incurred during shipment Use the following procedure to unpack and inspect
279. strument id 52 ok mode This command reports what operating mode the instrument is in local service or remote The following example shows that the instrument is in the remote mode Send mode Receive mode remote set mode local set mode remote These commands set the instrument to local or remote mode The following example sets the instrument to the local mode Send set mode local Receive set mode local ok allow mode cmd This command reports the current allow mode setting 1 allow set mode local and set mode remote commands 0 ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands according to Table B 11 The default value is 0 ignore the commands The following example shows that the instrument is configured to ignore set mode local or set mode remote commands Model 517 Instruction Manual B 41 C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration B 42 Model 51i Instruction Manual Send allow mode cmd Receive allow mode cmd O set allow mode cmd value This command is used to configure the instrument to value where value is either 1 accept or 0 ignore the set mode local and set mode remote commands according to Table B 11 If the instrument is set to accept the commands value 1 the set mode local command will unlock the instrument and the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to ignore the commands
280. strument is calibrated and tested for accuracy at the factory The calibration and accuracy tests are run using methane or propane standards at concentrations ranging from 10 to 50 000 ppmc A copy of the test results is included in the instrument packet Although data from the factory calibration test is stored in memory the operator must calibrate the instrument prior to initial use As a general rule a new instrument should also be re calibrated once each day As the operator gains experience with the instrument the frequency of calibration may be adjusted as needed In addition to daily calibration it is also recommended that the standard operating procedures should include an on going quality control plan that allows the frequency of calibration to be modified depending on historical calibration and or zero and span check data A quality control program is essential to ascertain the accuracy and reliability of the air quality data collected The data compiled for such a program might include items such as dates of calibration atmospheric conditions control settings and other pertinent data The Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems published by the U S EPA Research Triangle Park NC 27711 can be consulted for detailed quality assurance guidelines The following information is used to select the calibration gas used the response factors and choice of concentration units In order to establish the FID back
281. t s identification number plus 128 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 1 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Commands B 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual For example if the instrument ID is set to 51 then each command must begin with the ACSII character code 179 decimal The analyzer ignores any command that does not begin with its instrument identification number If the instrument ID is set to 0 then this byte is not required For more information on changing Instrument ID see Chapter 3 Operation The analyzer must be in the remote mode in order to change instrument parameters remotely However the command set mode remote can be sent to the analyzer to put it in the remote mode Report commands commands that don t begin with set can be issued either in the remote or local mode For information on changing modes see Chapter 3 Operation The commands are not case sensitive Each command must begin with the proper instrument identification number ASCII character The command in the following example begins with the ASCII character code 179 decimal which directs the command to the Model 517 and is terminated by a carriage return CR ASCII character code 13 decimal Many of the commands have two forms One form reads parameter from the instrument s memory and the other writes or updates a parameter The syntax for a write command adds the word set in front of the command and provides an argument
282. t Refer to the sp field command for information on how to edit the scratch pad The following example shows the list for streaming data output Send list stream Receive list stream field index variable x x time 1 1 THC 2 5 Det_Temp 3 8 Flame_Temp 4 10 Air PSI 5 11 Sample PSI 6 12 Fuel PSI er xy Ir xy sr xy x 0 1 Reply termination format see set format format command y 0 1 2 Output format see set erec lrec srec format format command These commands report the last lrecs or srecs stored or the erec data record In the following example the command requests an lrec with no checksum in ASCII format with text For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see Figure B 1 Send 1r01 Receive 1r01 09 15 01 04 07 flags 8530000 THC 0 004 THC_Avg 0 030 THC_High 4 098 THC_Low 1 479 Det_Temp 124 957 Filt Temp 124 725 Flame Temp 199 879 Int Temp 027 200 Air PSI 18 872 Sample PSI 4 792 Fuel PSI 19 008 erec This command returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions measurements and status at the time the command is issued The example that follows shows a typical response The format is defined by the current settings of the format and erec format commands For details on erec formatting see the Record Layout Definition section at the end of this appendix For details on how to decode the flag fields within these records see the flags command Thermo
283. t System Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 9 Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Pin Descriptions 6 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual The connector pin descriptions in Table 6 4 through Table 6 9 can be used along with the board level connection diagrams to troubleshoot board level faults Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 10 Measurement Interface Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 15 Front Panel Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 17 I O Expansion Board Optional Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 19 Digital Output Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 20 Input Board Connector Pin Descriptions on page 6 22 Table 6 4 Motherboard Connector Pin Descriptions Connector Reference Pin Signal Description Label Designator INTF DATA J1 1 Ground 2 RS485 to Interface Board 3 RS485 to Interface Board 10 BASE T J2 1 Ethernet Output 2 Ethernet Output 3 Ethernet Input 4 4 NC 5 NC 6 Ethernet Input 7 NC 8 NC EXPANSION BD J3 1 15V 2 24V 3 24V 4 Ground 5 Ground 6 Ground 7 RS485 to Expansion Board 8 RS485 to Expansion Board Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Connector Label Reference Designator Pin Troubleshooting Connector Pin Descriptions Signal Description SPARE DATA J4 oOo N C wo A CO N 5V 24V 24V Ground Ground Ground RS
284. t that this command be sent each time instrument parameters are changed If changes are not saved they will be lost in the event of a power failure Table B 2 lists the 51i C Link protocol commands The interface will respond to the command strings outlined below Table B 2 C Link Protocol Commands Command Description Page addr dns Reports sets domain name server address for Ethernet port B 37 addr gw Reports sets default gateway address for Ethernet port B 37 addr ip Reports sets IP address for Ethernet port B 38 addr nm Reports sets netmask address for Ethernet port B 38 addr ntp Reports sets IP address for network time protocol server B 38 air control pressure Reports sets current air control pressure B 32 air pressure Reports current air pressure B 10 alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm maximum value B 11 max alarm bias voltage Reports sets bias voltage alarm minimum value B 11 min alarm conc max Reports sets current THC concentration alarm maximum B 12 value alarm conc min Reports sets current THC concentration alarm minimum value B 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual B 3 C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm detector temp Reports sets detector temperature alarm maximum value B 12 max alarm detector temp Reports sets detector temperature alarm minimum value B 12 min a
285. t types of records which for historical reasons are named lrecs and srecs Each record 3 22 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument Controls Menu can contain up to 32 different fields or data items and records can be created at user defined intervals ranging from 1 to 60 minutes Record generation is tied to the instrument s real time clock For example if the logging period for srecs is set to 30 minutes a new srec will be generated on every hour and every half hour 10 00 10 30 11 00 Lrecs and srecs function independent of each other So for example an srec containing just the current THC level could be generated every 5 minutes while an lrec containing a full set of diagnostic data could be generated once every hour The analyzer s computer system includes three megabytes of flash memory which is enough to store a full lrec containing 32 data items and a full srec containing 32 items once each minute for a week 220 000 total records If logging is limited to the minimum content of date time THC concentration and error flags the analyzer can store data once each minute for 4 months gt 190 000 total records The Datalogging Settings menu allows the user flexibility in how data is stored and recorded e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Datalogging Settings EH DHOBM Select Srec Lrec The Select Srec Lrec screen is used to select the log record type f
286. tape from the gauge threads Using the adjustable pliers remove the regulator panel nut that is securing the regulator to the mounting bracket Removing the regulator mounting bracket may simplify the removal of the panel nut Remove the inlet and outlet fittings from the body of the regulator and clean any remaining pipe tape from the fitting threads Note the location and orientation of the fittings prior to removal to facilitate re installation Remove the socket head plug located in the rear side outlet port and clean any remaining pipe tape from the plug threads To install the new regulator follow the previous steps in reverse Replace the pipe thread tape on all fittings before installing Panel Nut Inlet Fitting Outlet Fitting Figure 7 17 Replacing the Pressure Regulator Thermo Fisher Scientific Hydrogen Zero Span Solenoid Valve Replacement Testing and Replacing the Thermo Fisher Scientific Ignitor Servicing Hydrogen Zero Span Solenoid Valve Replacement Use the following procedure to replace the hydrogen zero or span solenoid valve Equipment Required 2 Way solenoid valve assembly Wrench 1 2 inch Wrench 9 16 inch Wrench 5 8 inch Wrench 7 16 inch Teflon pipe thread tape 1 Disconnect the solenoid at its connector 2 Remove the attached tubing from the solenoid valve 3 Remove the solenoid valve assembly from the back panel and remove the fittings from the valve body Note th
287. te is set to 9600 to provide backwards compatibility with the older C series analyzers e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Baud Rate LEDRHZL POTENT DH DCHEMIP USE ILL UO PHLPUPPO Data Bits The Data Bits screen is used to set the number of serial data bits to either 7 or 8 default e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Data Bits Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 31 Operation Instrument Controls Menu Parity The Parity screen is used to select the parity bit for the serial port to None default Even or Odd e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Parity oO Mihei i Stop Bits The Stop Bits screen is used to set the number of stop bits for the serial port to 1 default or 2 e Inthe Main Menu choose Instrument Controls Communication Settings Serial Settings Stop Bits O PILQPUPMPO RS 232 RS 485 Selection The RS 232 RS 485 Selection screen allows the user to choose between the RS 232 or RS 485 specification for serial communication 232 and RS 485 selection to prevent damage to any equipment currently connected to the analyzer A T Equipment Damage Disconnect the serial cable before changing the RS 3 32 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Instrument C
288. the instrument 1 Remove the instrument from its shipping container and set it on a table or bench that allows easy access to both the front and rear Model 51i Instruction Manual 2 1 Installation Connecting Support Gases s l 2 Remove the cover to expose the internal components 3 Remove the packing material in the analyzer Figure 2 1 0 Units without Op Connecting Support Gases 2 2 Model 51i Instruction Manual fil Eie Remove Packing 2 pieces tional I O Board Figure 2 1 Remove the Packing Material 4 Check for possible damage during shipment Units with Optional 1 0 Board Remove Packing 2 pieces 5 Check that all connectors and circuit boards are firmly attached Except for the connector for the spare ignitor which is taped to the floor plate 6 Reinstall the cover 7 Remove any protective plastic material from the case exterior The Model 51i requires fuel gas hydrogen or hydrogen helium mix combustion air zero air and span gas Figure 2 2 shows the input ports for these gases All connections are designed for 1 4 inch outside diameter OD lines Fittings are supplied for making good leak tight connections High quality single or dual stage regulators should control all gas pressures To the extent possible high quality high purity support gases regulators and
289. the rear panel and set both supply pressures to 60 psi 2 Turn off any calibration gas supplies entering the instrument and relieve the pressure Make sure the manual air pressure regulator that is mounted to the oven is set to approximately 20 psi 3 From the Main Menu choose Instrument Controls gt Select Fuel gt Hydrogen 4 From the Main Menu choose Service gt Set Pressure and Flow For more information see Set Pressure and Flow in Chapter 3 Operation 5 From the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose H2 Fuel Run Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 25 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port 6 Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose H2 Fuel Ignite Set the pressure to create a fuel flow of 30 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Model 51i Instruction Manual 7 53 Servicing Adjusting Critical Gas Flows Set the Sample Pressure Set the Combustion Air Pressure Adjusting For Mixed Fuel H2 He Set the Fuel Pressure 7 54 Model 51i Instruction Manual Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Sample Run Set the pressure to create a sample air flow of 15 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is
290. tion factor that will bring the instrument reading in line with the actual span gas concentration must be determined This coefficient is a multiplier that can be applied to the estimated concentration reading A span coefficient that is less than 1 00 would suggest that the instrument signal is slightly stronger than expected and a span coefficient that is greater than 1 00 would suggest a signal that is weaker than expected for a given span gas concentration Typically the span coefficient will range from 0 2 to 5 0 but numbers outside that range are also acceptable When considering the span coefficient the operator should be aware that analytical performance is dependent on the signal to noise ratio not just signal strength Even though a span coefficient of greater than 1 00 suggests that the sensitivity may be less than average it does not necessarily indicate sub standard analytical performance While the absolute value of the span coefficient is not tremendously important a span coefficient that changes significantly over time may suggest that service is required Once the zero signal and the span coefficient have been determined a given detector signal can be converted to a concentration reading using the following formula Concentration Detector Signal Zero Offset X Calibration Factor X Span Coefficient As noted earlier the relationship between detector signal and concentration has been demonstrated to be linear over
291. tive Products to Seller with all costs prepaid by Buyer Replacement parts may be new or refurbished at the election of Seller All replaced parts shall become the property of Seller Shipment to Buyer of repaired or replacement Products shall be made in accordance with the Delivery provisions of the Seller s Terms and Conditions of Sale Consumables including but not limited to lamps fuses batteries bulbs and other such expendable items are expressly excluded from the warranty under this warranty Notwithstanding the foregoing Products supplied by Seller that are obtained by Seller from an original manufacturer or third party supplier are not warranted by Seller but Seller agrees to assign to Buyer any warranty rights in such Product that Seller may have from the original manufacturer or third party supplier to the extent such assignment is allowed by such original manufacturer or third party supplier In no event shall Seller have any obligation to make repairs replacements or corrections required in whole or in part as the result of i normal wear and tear ii accident disaster or event of force majeure iii misuse fault or negligence of or by Buyer iv use of the Products in a manner for which Model 517 Instruction Manual A 1 Warranty Warranty they were not designed v causes external to the Products such as but not limited to power failure or electrical power surges vi improper storage and handling of the Pro
292. tor base temperature filter temperature pump temperature only in Model 512 HT flame temperature and internal temperature The internal temperature is the air temperature measured by a sensor located on the measurement interface board e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Temperatures Pressures The Pressures screen read only displays the sample pressure fuel pressure and air pressure readings e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Pressures EH DHOBM Detector Signal The Detector Signal screen read only displays the current adjusted detector signal in Hertz e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics Detector Signal Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51i Instruction Manual 3 55 Operation Diagnostics Menu FID Status The FID Status screen displays information about the current state of the detector and allows the user to initiate ignition STATUS specifies the current FID status Possible messages are error flame out pressure wait igniting checking or lit COUNTS specifies the current unadjusted detector signal in Hertz and can range from 0 to 500 000 FLAME specifies the current flame temperature A flame temperature higher than the FID base temperature indicates that the flame is currently lit DET BASE specifies the current FID base temperature If the FID flame is out pressing 9 will trigger the ignition sequence e Inthe Main Menu choose Diagnostics gt FID Status Flame Out Power
293. ts digital output channel and active state B 46 dtoa Reports outputs of the digital to analog converters per B 46 channel en enter Simulates pressing enter pushbutton B 28 er Returns a brief description of the main operating conditions B 20 in the format specified in the commands erec Returns a snapshot of the main operating conditions B 20 measurements and status in the specified format erec format Reports sets erec format B 22 erec layout Reports current layout of erec data B 23 filter temp Reports temperature at the sample filter B 10 flags Reports current active measurement status flags in plain B 18 ASCII text flame temp Reports FID flame temperature B 10 flow pressure Reports current sample flow pressure B 10 format Reports sets current reply termination format B 40 frequency Reports raw FID signal B 11 fuel control Reports sets current fuel control pressure B 33 pressure fuel pressure Reports current fuel pressure B 10 fuel type Reports sets current fuel type B 35 gas mode Reports current mode of sample zero or span B 31 gas unit Reports sets current gas units B 32 he help Simulates pressing help pushbutton B 28 high value Reports current high THC concentration B 11 host name Reports sets host name string B 40 Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page idle Reports sets
294. ts that the pump temperature alarm minimum value is 135 0 C Send alarm pump temp min Receive alarm pump temp min 135 0 deg C set alarm pump temp min value set alarm pump temp max value These commands set the pump temperature alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the pump temperature alarm limits in degrees C The following example sets the pump temperature alarm maximum value to 210 C Send set alarm pump temp max 210 Receive set alarm pump temp max 210 ok Model 51i Instruction Manual B 15 C Link Protocol Commands Alarms B 16 Model 51i Instruction Manual alarm signal min alarm signal max These commands report the current signal strength alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the signal strength alarm minimum value is 001 Send alarm signal min Receive alarm signal min 0 001 set alarm signal min value set alarm signal max value These commands set the signal strength alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the signal strength alarm limits The following example sets the signal strength alarm maximum value to 100 Send set alarm signal max 100 Receive set alarm signal max 100 ok alarm span noise min alarm span noise max These commands report the current span noise alarm minimum and maximum value settings The following example reports that the span noi
295. uld have a resistance of about 2 to 10 ohms Note The ignitor should be replaced if the resistance is outside this window A 4 Ifthe spare ignitor is still in working order simply disconnect the damaged ignitor from the pink connector coming from pin 1 of J27 and plug in the spare Use the following procedure to replace the ignitor Figure 7 18 If neither ignitor is in working order it is recommended that both be replaced 5 Locate the ignitor power cable and disconnect the pink connector coming from pin 1 of J27 of the measurement interface board 6 Remove the oven cover to access the detector and locate the ignitor s screwed into the side of the detector housing 7 Using the 5 16 inch wrench unscrew the ignitor s from the detector 8 Install the new ignitor s into the detector being sure to include the copper ring that acts as a gasket between the plug and the detector housing Thermo Fisher Scientific Checking the Detector Bias Thermo Fisher Scientific Voltage Servicing Checking the Detector Bias Voltage 9 Re connect the ignitor power cable to the pink connector going to pin 1 of J27 on the measurement interface board 10 Shut the instrument fuel supply off at the source Disconnect the fuel line from the back of the instrument and be sure the IGN BIAS connector is re installed on the measurement interface board 11 Before installing the oven cover test the new ignitor s To do this loosen
296. um value B 16 min B 4 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Commands Command Description Page alarm trig conc Reports sets current concentration alarm trigger sense B 16 alarm zero noise Reports sets zero noise alarm maximum value B 17 max alarm zero noise Reports sets zero noise alarm minimum value B 17 min allow mode cmd Reports sets whether set mode locks instrument front B 41 panel analog iout range Reports sets analog current output range per channel B 44 analog vin Retrieves analog voltage input data per channel B 45 analog vout range Reports sets analog voltage output range per channel B 45 avg time Reports sets averaging time B 9 avg value Reports current THC average concentration B 11 base temp Reports temperature at the detector base B 10 baud Reports sets current baud rate B 39 bias voltage Reports current bias supply voltage B 17 cal thc bkg Sets THC background B 27 cal thc coef Sets THC coefficient B 27 calibrate Sets THC coefficient B 27 clr Irecs Clears away only Irecs that have been saved B 18 clr records Clears away all logging records that have been saved B 18 clr srecs Clears away only srecs that have been saved B 18 contrast Reports sets current screen contrast B 34 copy Irec to sp Sets copies current Irec selection into the scratch pad B 25 copy sp to Irec Sets copi
297. um value is 001 Send alarm zero noise min Receive alarm zero noise min 0 001 set alarm zero noise min value set alarm zero noise max value These commands set the zero noise alarm minimum and maximum values to value where value is a floating point number representing the zero noise alarm limits The following example sets the zero noise alarm maximum value to 100 Send set alarm zero noise max 100 Receive set alarm zero noise max 100 ok bias voltage This command reports the current bias supply voltage The following example reports that the bias voltage is 302 3 volts Send bias voltage Receive bias voltage 302 3 V diag volt mb This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the motherboard The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and negative 3 3 Each voltage value is separated by a space Model 51i Instruction Manual B 17 C Link Protocol Commands Datalogging Datalogging B 18 Model 51i Instruction Manual Send diag volt mb Receive diag volt mb 23 90 14 89 4 94 3 27 3 16 diag volt mib This command reports the diagnostic voltage measurements on the measurement interface board The sequence of voltages is positive 24 positive 15 negative 15 positive 5 positive 3 3 and positive 15 Each voltage value is separated by a space Send diag volt mib Receive diag volt mib 23 96 14 98 15 05 4 96 3 27 14 97 diag volt iob This command reports the diag
298. und 20 Ground 9 lOut5 21 Analog In7 10 Isolated ground 22 Analog In8 11 IOut6 23 Ground 12 Isolated ground 24 Ground Thermo Fisher Scientific Model 51 Instruction Manual 2 11 Installation Startup Startup 2 12 Model 51i Instruction Manual Once the electrical and gas connections are complete the instrument can be turned on and the Power Up screen appears Following the Power Up screen a message briefly appears indicating either a Cold Start Warm Start or Hot Start The Cold Start message appears if the oven is at ambient temperature when the instrument is turned on The Warm Start message appears if the instrument has been off for a relatively short period of time and the oven is greater than 7596 of the oven set temperature The Hot Start message appears if the instrument has been off for a very short period of time and the oven is within 5 degrees of the oven set temperature After the initial diagnostics the Warming Up message appears until the oven set temperature is reached and the pump turns on The Stabilizing screen then appears and remains on until the oven stabilizes 5 minutes for a warm start 30 minutes for a cold start and no stabilization period for a hot start When the oven stabilizes the fuel solenoid opens the flame lights and the Run screen appears If the 51 fails to light after the ignition sequence it will pause for 15 minutes and then re enter the ignition cycle If it still
299. urce of noise by comparing analog signal to data collected through RS 232 or Fthernet Non linear response Thermo Fisher Scientific Leak in sample probe line Leak within the analyzer Problem with input board range switching Check for variable dilution Check for loose fittings in analyzer Go to Input Board Test screen Service menu and step through each range while the instrument samples a known stable source of gas Model 51i Instruction Manual 6 5 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Guides 6 6 Model 51i Instruction Manual Malfunction Possible Cause Action Stay on the Input Board Test screen and while holding instrument on the lowest gain step the calibrator through gas levels Excessive response time Slow averaging time chosen Leak within the analyzer Check the averaging time screen Check for loose fittings in analyzer Analog signal doesn t match expected value Alarm Message Alarm Internal Temp Firmware has not been configured Analog output goes above full scale or below zero Recorder is loading down output Analog outputs are not calibrated Possible Cause Fan stopped Fan filter is dirty Sensor failed Verify that the selected analog output has been properly configured to match the data system and that the outputs have been calibrated By default a 596 over and under range on the analog outputs is provided If this is not desirable due to syste
300. urement averaging time in seconds The following example shows that the averaging time is 300 seconds according to Table B 3 Send avg time Receive avg time 11 300 sec set avg time selection This command sets the concentration measurement averaging time in seconds according to Table B 3 The following example sets the averaging time to 120 seconds Send set avg time 8 Receive set avg time 8 ok Table B 3 Averaging Times Selection Averaging Time 0 1 seconds 2 5 10 20 30 60 o ao rnTnsy ost a Bi wt pr o N IR o Model 51i Instruction Manual B 9 C Link Protocol Commands Measurements B 10 Model 51i Instruction Manual air pressure This command reports the current air pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the air pressure is 19 7 psi Send air pressure Receive air pressure 19 7 psi fuel pressure This command reports the current fuel pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the fuel pressure is 28 0 psi Send fuel pressure Receive fuel pressure 28 0 psi pressure flow pressure sample pressure These commands report the current sample flow pressure measurement in PSI The following example reports that the sample pressure measurement is 5 6 psi Send sample pressure Receive sample pressure 5 6 psi base temp This command reports the current detector base temperature in degrees C The following exam
301. urrent outputs The optional I O expansion board includes six isolated current outputs These are firmware configured for any one of the following ranges while maintaining a minimum resolution of 11 bits e 0 20 mA e 4 20 mA The user can calibrate each analog output zero and span point through the firmware At least 5 of full scale over and under range are also supported but may be overridden in the firmware if required The analog outputs may be assigned to any measurement or diagnostic channel with a user defined range in the units of the selected parameter Model 51i Instruction Manual 8 9 System Description 1 0 Components Analog Voltage Inputs Optional Digital Relay Outputs Digital Inputs 8 10 Model 51 Instruction Manual The current outputs are independent of the voltage outputs The current outputs are isolated from the instrument power and ground but they share a common return line Isolated GND The optional I O expansion board includes eight analog voltage inputs These inputs are used to gather measurement data from third party devices such as meteorological equipment The user may assign a label unit and a conversion table 2 to 10 points Each point in the conversion table consists of an analog input voltage value 0 10 5 V and a corresponding user defined reading value Only two points are necessary for linear inputs however a larger number of points may be used to approximate non linear inputs
302. used for MODBUS RTU over serial connections Note Device ID 0 used for broadcast MODBUS commands is not supported Device IDs 128 through 247 i e 0x80 hex to OxF7 hex are not supported because of limitations imposed by C Link A In MODBUS over TCP IP MODBUS Application Protocol Header MBAP is used to identify the message This header consists of the following components Transaction Identifier 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Passed back in response Protocol Identifier 2 Bytes 0x00 MODBUS protocol Length 2 Bytes 0x0000 to OxFFFF Number of following bytes Unit Identifier 1 Byte 0x00 to OxFF Passed back in response Thermo Fisher Scientific Function Code Data Error Check Function Codes 0x01 0x02 Read Coils Read Inputs Thermo Fisher Scientific MODBUS Protocol Function Codes A slave address is not required in MODBUS over TCP IP because the higher level protocols include device addressing The unit identifier is not used by the instrument The function code is a single byte in length The following function codes are supported by the instrument Read Coils 0x01 Read Inputs 0x02 Read Holding Registers 0x05 Read Input Registers 0x04 0x05 Force Write Single Coil Read Exception Status 0x06 If a function code is received that is not in this list an invalid function exception is returned The data field varies depending on the function For more description of these data fields see Functi
303. value 0 the instrument will respond with ok as if the command has been accepted and acted upon but it will not change the instrument lock status this is for compatibility with systems expecting and ok response Note The instrument will always respond to the command mode with the status of the password lock as mode local or mode remote regardless of the above setting A The following example sets the instrument to accept the set mode local and set mode remote commands Send set allow mode cmd 1 Receive set allow mode cmd 1 ok Table B 11 Allow Mode Command Values Value Allow Mode Command 0 Ignore default 1 Accept power up mode This command reports the current power up mode setting to either 0 local unlocked or 1 remote locked according to Table B 12 The default value is 0 power up in local unlocked mode The following example shows that the instrument is configured to power up in the remote unlocked mode Send power up mode Receive power up mode 1 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Communications Configuration set power up mode value This command is used to configure the instrument to power up in the local unlocked mode value 0 or the remote locked mode value 1 according to Table B 12 If the instrument is set to power up in the local remote mode the keypad can be used to make changes via the front panel If the instrument is set to
304. verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Sample Ignite Set the pressure to create a sample air flow of 20 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Run Set the pressure to create an air flow of 180 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Return to the Set Pressure and Flow screen choose Air Ignite Set the pressure to create an air flow of 175 cc min and save Repeat this adjustment if necessary until the correct flow rate is verified from the flow meter attached to the FID exhaust port Record the stored pressure value Re connect the IGN BIAS supply cable at J27 located on the measurement interface board Remove the flow meter from the FID exhaust port Proceed to the following section Optimizing the Gas Flows Use the following procedure to adjust the gas flows for mixed fuel H2 He This includes e Set the Fuel Pressure e Set the Sample Pressure e Set the Combustion Air Pressure 1 Connect mixed fuel H2 He and air to the instrument s fuel bulkhead fitting and air bulkhead fitting respectively on the rear panel and set the supply pressures
305. which only sends the subsequent command to the instrument No user prompting happens The following string through an optional or the end of the line is the command which is to be sent to the instrument upon the completion of the button selection The command string should normally contain print style formatting to include the user input If a is present it indicates a command which is sent to the instrument upon successful completion of the button command to update the value field Some examples n is the C syntax for an end of line character Concentrations n This is a single text only line Li n This is a single blank line NO 3s n This is a line which appears slightly indented The text field is NO the value is taken from the third element of the data response and interpreted as a string NO 18sBd ddd set no coef s n This is a line which also appears slightly indented The next field is also NO but the value is taken from the eighteenth element of the data response again interpreted as a string A button appears on this line which when pressed pops up an input dialog which will state Please enter a new value for NO using a d ddd format The string entered by the user is used to construct the output command If the user enters for example 1 234 the constructed command will be set no coef 1 234 Thermo Fisher Scientific C Link Protocol Commands Record Layout Definition NO
306. wing example sets the air control pressure to 15 psi Send set air control pressure 1 O 15 000 Receive set air control pressure 1 O 15 000 ok Table B Fuel and Status Values Fuel Type Status Set 0 Hydrogen 0 Run 1 Mixed 1 Ignite fuel control pressure This command reports the current fuel control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example shows that for mixed fuel during ignition the fuel control pressure is set to 15 psi Send fuel control pressure 1 1 Receive fuel control pressure 1 1 15 000 set fuel control pressure fuel status value This command sets the fuel control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example sets the fuel control pressure for mixed fuel during the run mode to value where value is a floating point number representing the fuel control pressure in PSI The following example sets the fuel control pressure to 15 psi Send set fuel control pressure 1 0 15 000 Receive set fuel control pressure 1 0 15 000 ok sample control pressure This command reports the current sample control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example shows that for mixed fuel during ignition the sample control pressure is set to 5 psi Send sample control pressure 1 1 Receive sample control pressure 1 1 5 000 set sample control pressure fuel status value This command sets the sample control pressure according to Table B 8 The following example sets the sample control pressure for mixed
307. xpansion board is not detected Send analog vin 1 Receive analog vin 1 75 325 2 796 V analog vout range channel This command reports the analog voltage output channel range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive according to Table B 15 The following example reports that analog voltage output channel 2 is set to 3 0 10 V Send analog vout range 2 Receive analog vout range 2 3 set analog vout range channel range This command sets analog voltage output channel to the range where channel is between 1 and 6 inclusive and range is set according to Table B 15 The following example sets channel 2 to the 0 10 V range Send set analog vout range 2 3 Receive set analog vout range 2 3 ok Table B 15 Analog Voltage Output Range Values Range Output Range 1 0 1 V 2 0 100 mV 3 0 10 V 4 0 5 V 0 cannot be set to this but may report Undefined dig in This command reports the status of the digital inputs as a 4 digit hexadecimal string with the most significant bit MSB being input 16 Send dig in Receive dig in Oxff7f Model 51i Instruction Manual B 45 C Link Protocol Commands 1 0 Configuration B 46 Model 51i Instruction Manual din channel This command reports the action assigned to the digital input channel and the index number of the corresponding active state The following example reports input 5 to be assigned an index number 9 corresponding to action of analog outputs to zero with th
308. y of the type of unit selected the unit selection does not affect the instrument s measurement procedure 3 8 Model 51i Instruction Manual Thermo Fisher Scientific Thermo Fisher Scientific Operation Range Menu When switching the selected units the instrument s analog ranges all default to the highest range For example when switching from mg m to ppm all the ranges default to 50000 ppm Therefore whenever you change units you should also check the range settings Note If the units change the instrument should be re calibrated A display warning will appear A The Model 51 cannot convert between the various units of concentration Therefore the unit selected must match the units used to express the concentration of the span gas It is especially important to understand that when measuring gases and vapors the common units of ppb ppm and ppmc are based on volume of contaminant per volume of sample gas A gas containing 100 ppm of methane would contain 100 liters of methane per 1 000 000 liters of gas In contrast concentrations expressed in mg m and ug m are based on the mass of contaminant per unit volume of sample gas Therefore conversion between units of ppm and mg m requires knowledge of the specific hydrocarbon present in the sample A e Inthe Main Menu choose Range Conc Units Select Range The Select Range screen defines the concentration range of the analog outputs For example selecting a THC range

Model 51i - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents